Open Collections

UBC Theses and Dissertations

UBC Theses Logo

UBC Theses and Dissertations

Capital investment appraisal for advanced mining technology : case studies in GPS and information based… Dessureault, Sean 1999

Your browser doesn't seem to have a PDF viewer, please download the PDF to view this item.

Item Metadata

Download

Media
831-ubc_1999-0118.pdf [ 23.46MB ]
Metadata
JSON: 831-1.0081151.json
JSON-LD: 831-1.0081151-ld.json
RDF/XML (Pretty): 831-1.0081151-rdf.xml
RDF/JSON: 831-1.0081151-rdf.json
Turtle: 831-1.0081151-turtle.txt
N-Triples: 831-1.0081151-rdf-ntriples.txt
Original Record: 831-1.0081151-source.json
Full Text
831-1.0081151-fulltext.txt
Citation
831-1.0081151.ris

Full Text

Capital Investment Appraisal for Advanced Mining Technology: Case Studies in GPS and Information Based Surface Mining Technology By Sean Dessureault B. Eng., McGill University, 1997 A thesis submitted in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of M a s t e r o f A p p l i e d Science The Faculty of Graduate Studies Department of Mining and Mineral Process Engineering University of British Columbia We accept this thesis as conforming to the referred standard  The University of British Columbia February 1999 ©Sean David Dessureault, 1999 Author: Sean Dessureault B.Eng., McGill University, 1997 M.A.Sc. Candidate University of British Columbia Mining and Mineral Process Engineering Dessurea@unixg.ubc.ca  Supervisor: Dr. Malcolm J. Scoble M.M.P.E. Department Head Co-Supervisor: Dr. Scott Dunbar Industrial Supervisor: Dr. M . G. Lipsett Industrial Supervisor: Mr. Paul Richard  In  presenting  degree  at  this  the  thesis  in  partial  fulfilment  of  University  of  British  Columbia,  I agree  freely available for copying  of  department publication  this or of  reference  thesis by  for  his  this  thesis  and study. scholarly  or  her  for  I further  purposes  requirements that  agree  may  representatives.  financial  the  It  gain shall not  be is  that  the  Library  permission  granted  by  understood be  of  M f m ^  The University of British Vancouver, Canada  Date  DE-6 (2/88)  /JcrcU  ^  <wl  AWraA  Columbia  [<?<?<?  f,„,„cr  an  f ^ ^ e r . ' ^  advanced  shall make for  the that  allowed without  permission.  Department  for  it  extensive  head  of  my  copying  or  my  written  Justification Techniques for Mining Automation  1  ii  Abstract  Canadian, American and Australian mining industries are currently faced with the requirement to streamline their operations in light of new economic realities. Automation has been seen as a key step toward the survival and competitiveness of these industries. Unfortunately, technology providers seldom have the expertise or resources to properly transfer technology from the development stage to the productive stage. Mining companies, the potential customers of technology providers are similarly inexperienced at appraising and implementing these new technologies. The manufacturing industry is well experienced in appraising (referred most commonly in manufacturing as justifying) and implementing new technology and has developed numerous capital investment appraisal (CIA) methods that can more accurately appraise new technology. These techniques offer the potential to be adapted to suit the mining industry. The primary objective of this thesis is to investigate the usefulness of various decisionmaking tools in the CIA of advanced technologies for the mining industry. This research discusses the current technological situation in the mining industry to show the requirement for new capital appraisal techniques. The current evaluation methods are analyzed and their weaknesses are identified. The classification schemes and CIA methods derived from the manufacturing industry are adapted to mining. Analytical examples are provided in terms of hypothetical situations and two case studies at an open pit copper mine in British Columbia are described. The first case study reveals the limitations of current CIA methods when applied to advanced technology and applies alternative CIA techniques whose applicability is rated by the decision-maker at the mine as being "very useful". The second case study uses object based simulation as a CIA tool for a blending project by estimating parameters within the project that were previously only subjective opinion.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Table of Contents  iii  2  Table of Contents  1  ABSTRACT  2  T A B L E O F CONTENTS  3  T A B L E O F FIGURES  VII  4  T A B L E O F EQUATIONS  VIII  5  LIST O F TABLES  IX  6  ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS  XI  7  LIST O F ACRONYMS  1  INTRODUCTION  2  3  II Ill  XII 1  1.1  OBJECTIVES  2  1.2  CONTRIBUTIONS  2  1.3  METHODOLOGY  3  1.4  THESIS STRUCTURE  3  DEFINITIONS & REASONING  5  2.1  DEFINITIONS  5  2.2  INADEQUACIES  6  2.3  R E A S O N S FOR T H E I N A D E Q U A C Y OF T R A D I T I O N A L JUSTIFICATION S C H E M E S  6  CLASSIFICATION O F TECHNOLOGIES AND CIA METHODS 3.1  CLASSIFICATION S C H E M E  3.2  T H R E E JUSTIFICATION C A T E G O R I E S  3.2.1 Levell 3.2.1.1 Level 1: Manufacturing - Stand Alone Systems 3.2.1.2 Level 1 - Mining - Production Units 3.2.1.3 Level 1 - Economic CIA methods 3.2.1.3.1 Simulation over blanket hurdle rates for New Technology 3.2.1.3.2 Acceptable level of Risk & Management's personal attitude towards risk 3.2.1.3.3 Financial Analysis Paramount 3.2.1.3.4 Conclusion to Financial CIA methods 3.2.2 Level 2 3.2.2.1 Level 2: Manufacturing - Cells 3.2.2.2 Analysis of Mining as a Muck Factory 3.2.2.2.1 Exploration 3.2.2.2.2 Production 3.2.2.2.3 Discussion of the Analysis 3.2.3 Level 2 Mining - Integrated process 3.2.4 Level 2 CIA methods 3.2.5 Level 3 3.2.5.1 Level 3: Manufacturing - Linked Islands 3.2.5.2 Level 3: Mining - Total Mine Integration 3.2.5.3 Level 3 CIA methods 3.2.5.3.1 Analysis of risk and uncertainty 3.2.5.3.2 Management's attitude towards risk 3.2.5.3.3 Risk identification 3.2.5.3.4 Risk application 3.2.6 Level 4 : 3.2.6.1 Level 4: Manufacturing - Full integration  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  9 9 11  13 13 14 14 15 15 16 18 18 18 19 19 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 25 25 26 26 28 28  Sean Dessureault  Table of Contents  3.2.6.2 3.2.7 4  iv  Level 4: Mining - Blue-Sky R&D Classification Conclusion  ANALYTICAL EXAMPLES 4.1  L E V E L 1 CIA M E T H O D S - C O M M O N E C O N O M I C  4.1.1 Payback 4.1.1.1 Analytical Example of the Payback Method 4.1.1.2 Analysis of the Validity of the Payback Method 4.1.1.3 Reasoning for Selecting the Payback method 4.1.2 Discounted Cash Flow Techniques (DCF) 4.1.2.1 Net Present Value 4.1.2.1.1 Numerical Example of the NPV method 4.1.2.1.2 Validity of the NPV method 4.1.2.1.3 Reasoning for selecting the NPV method 4.1.2.2 Internal Rate of Return (IRR) 4.1.2.2.1 Numerical Example Illustrating the IRR method 4.1.2.2.2 Validity of the IRR method 4.1.3 Risk Considerations 4.2  L E V E L 2 JUSTIFICATION S C H E M E S - P O R T F O L I O & S C O R I N G M O D E L S  4.2.1 Programming models 4.2.1.1 Integer Programming 4.2.1.2 Goal Programming 4.2.2 Scoring Models 4.2.2.1 Weighted Average Method 4.2.2.2 The Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP) 4.2.3 Option Pricing  29 31 31  31 31 32 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 36 37 37 38  38 38 40 42 42 43 48  4.2.3.1  Black-Scholes  49  4.2.3.2 4.2.3.3  Binomial Options Theory Azzone's option-based model for Manufacturing systems  50 52  4.3  L E V E L 3 JUSTIFICATION S C H E M E S - R I S K & A N A L Y T I C M E T H O D S  4.3.1 Value Analysis 4.3.2 Decision Analysis 4.3.2.1 Payoff Table 4.3.2.2 Expected Value 4.3.2.3 Decision Trees 4.3.2.4 Expected Value of Perfect Information (EVPI) 4.3.2.5 Multistage Decisions 4.3.2.6 Baye's Theorem 4.3.2.7 Sensitivity Analysis 4.3.2.8 Utility Theory 4.3.2.9 Mining Companies' attitudes toward Risk 4.3.2.10 Discussion of Decision Analysis & Other methods 4.3.2.10.1 Laplace approach 4.3.2.10.2 4.3.2.10.3  5  28  55  56 56 58 59 59 61 62 63 67 67 72 72 73  Maximax Maximin  73 74  4.3.2.10.4 Minimax Regret 4.3.2.11 Conclusion to Decision Analysis 4.3.3 Risk Analysis 4.3.3.1 Simulation as a Justification Tool 4.3.3.2 History of Simulation  74 75 75 75 76  BACKGROUND  TO PRACTICAL EXAMPLES  77  5.1  C H R O N O L O G Y OF R E S E A R C H  77  5.2  H I G H L A N D V A L L E Y COPPER M I N E : B A C K G R O U N D INFORMATION  78  5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5  Location Production Statistics Maintenance Environment Human Resources  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  # 79 SO 80 SO 7  Sean Dessureault  Table of Contents  5.2.6 5.3  Ownership & Hierarchy  5.4  AQUILA technology Blasting Methodology Pre-Technological Improvement Chronology of Technology A cquisition Changes Anticipated Anticipated Analytical benefits Anticipated Financial benefits Reasoning Behind Level 2 Classification  85 87 87 87 88 88 89  CAES Technology Chronology Current System Optimization of Ore Blending Associated Technologies Financial Reasoningfor CAES/Blending project Blending Summary  89 92 93 98 101 103 104  PRACTICAL E X A M P L E S O F T H EJUSTIFICATION SCHEMES 6.1  6.2  106  C A S E S T U D Y 1: A Q U I L A D R I L L T E C H N O L O G Y & F R A G M E N T A T I O N O P T I M I Z A T I O N  6.1.1 Current Blasting Methodology 6.1.1.1 Preliminary Surveying 6.1.1.2 Blast Design 6.1.1.3 Plan Execution 6.1.2 Qualitative Benefits 6.1.2.1 Predicted Qualitative Benefits 6.1.2.2 Unpredicted Benefits 6.1.2.2.1 Potential Projects: 6.1.2.2.2 Unpredicted Qualitative benefits 6.1.3 Financial Benefits 6.1.4 Costs & Financial Assessment 6.1.5 Analysis of Results 6.1.5.1 Original Justification Circumstances 6.1.5.2 Financial Assessment 6.1.5.2.1 Taking into account the long-term effects 6.1.5.2.2 Assumptions about the Future 6.1.5.2.3 Benefits Ignored 6.1.5.2.4 Management Control 6.1.6 Selection of Level 2 Justification Scheme(s) 6.1.7 Application ofAHP at HVC C A S E S T U D Y 2: C A E S T E C H N O L O G Y & O R E B L E N D I N G  6.2.1 Weakness in Current Justification of Ore Blending project. 6.2.2 Simulation Description 6.2.2.1 Ore Generating Module 6.2.2.2 Alternating truck allocations module 6.2.2.3 Blending on Crusher Apron Feeder Module 6.2.2.4 Optimization of Feed onto Storage Piles Module 6.2.3 Simulation Results 6.2.4 Validity of the results 6.2 A. 1 Lack of real-time optimization algorithm 6.2.4.2 Lack of other blending control mechanisms 6.2.4.3 On-site characteristics not fully modeled 6.2.4.4 Milling Characteristics 6.2.4.5  Ore Variability  6.2.4.6 Limitations of the Hardware 6.2.5 Application of Simulation Results 6.2.6 Conclusion and Recommendations for Case Study 2 CONCLUSIONS  A N D RECOMMENDATIONS  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  81  82  C A S E S T U D Y 2: C A E S TECHNOLOGY & O R E B L E N D I N G  5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7  7  80  C A S E S T U D Y 1: A Q U I L A D R I L L T E C H N O L O G Y & F R A G M E N T A T I O N O P T I M I Z A T I O N  5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.4.1 5.3.4.2 5.3.5  6  v  106  106 106 106 107 107 108 109 109 110 Ul 113 113 114 114 114 115 117 119 119 120 121  121 123 123 124 125 126 129 129 129 130 130 130 130  131 132 134 136  Sean Dessureault  Table of Contents  vi  7.1  SUMMARY OF THE INVESTIGATION  136  7.2  SIGNIFICANT CONTRIBUTIONS MADE BY THIS THESIS INCLUDE:  137  CONCLUSIONS  137  7.3  7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 lA  Thesis Stimulus Review of the CIA methods Review of the Main Conclusion of the Practical Applications Validity of the Approach RECOMMENDATIONS  137 137 138 139 139  8  REFERENCES  141  9  LIST OF APPENDICES  148  9.1  APPENDIX 1: INTEGER PROGRAMMING  149  9.2  APPENDIX 2: G O A L PROGRAMMING  152  9.3  APPENDIX 3: ORIGINAL A F E  155  9.4  APPENDIX 4: CAES AFE  158  9.5  APPENDIX 6: SIMULATION RESULTS  184  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Table of Contents  3  vii  Table o f F i g u r e s  FIGURE 3-1: A D V A N C E D MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY CONTINUUM  11  FIGURE 3-2: A D V A N C E D MINING TECHNOLOGY CONTINUUM  11  FIGURE 3-3: C I A METHODS  12  FIGURE 3-4: JUSTIFICATION APPROACHES FOR A D V A N C E D MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS, AFTER MEREDITH AND HILL  13  FIGURE 3-5: CHOOSING THE APPROPRIATE C I A METHOD  29  FIGURE 4-1: OPTIMAL SOLUTION FOR MINECOMP EXAMPLE  40  FIGURE 4-2: OPTIMAL SOLUTION FOR THE O P M C E X A M P L E  41  FIGURE 4-3: PAIRWISE COMPARISON MATRIX SOLUTION FOR 3X3 EXAMPLE  45  FIGURE 4-4: PAIRWISE COMPARISON MATRIX FOR OBJECTIVES FOR I O M EXAMPLE  46  FIGURE 4-5: NORMALIZED PAIRWISE COMPARATIVE MATRIX  46  FIGURE 4-6: PAIRWISE COMPARISON MATRIX OF OPTIONS FOR FRAGEMENTATION FOR I O M E X A M P L E  48  FIGURE 4-7: FINAL SOLUTION FOR I O M E X A M P L E  48  FIGURE 4-8: BINOMIAL FLUCTUATIONS  50  FIGURE 4-9: OPTION PAYOFF  51  FIGURE 4-10: N O R M A L C U R V E DISTRIBUTION P(CF) VS C F  54  FIGURE 4-11: DECISION ANALYSIS PROCESS  57  FIGURE 4-12: DECISION TREE  60  FIGURE 4-13: DECISION T R E E EXAMPLE  61  FIGURE 4-14: MULTI-STAGE DECISION TREE  63  FIGURE 4-15: DECISION T R E E FOR U N M C EXAMPLE  66  FIGURE 4-16: SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS DECISION TREE  67  FIGURE 4-17:UTILITY C U R V E FOR U N M C MANAGER  69  FIGURE 4-18: UTILITY CURVES FOR VARIOUS RISK PREFERENCES  70  FIGURE 4-19: DECISION T R E E USING UTILITY VALUES  71  FIGURE 5-1: H V C LOCATION  79  FIGURE 5-2: H V C M A N A G E M E N T HIERARCHY  81  FIGURE 5 - 3 : 4 9 R DRILL RIG SHOWING G P S RECEIVERS  82  FIGURE 5-4: SCREEN SHOT - OPERATOR'S STATUS SCREEN  83  FIGURE 5-5: UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING DRILL DATA IN THE DRILL CAB (LEFT) AND IN THE MINE ENGINEERING OFFICE (RIGHT)  84  FIGURE 5-6: DRILL NAVIGATION SCREEN  85  FIGURE 5-7: FRONT-END LOADER OPERATOR'S VIEW OF THE C A E S SCREEN  90  FIGURE 5-8: GRINDING AT H V C  93  FIGURE 5-9: CONVEYOR B E L T FLOWSHEET, H V C , JUNE, 1998 FIGURE 5-10: COARSE O R E STORAGE PILES  95 '.  96  FIGURE 5-11: SURGE PILE  97  FIGURE 5-12: MATERIAL FLOW  97  FIGURE 5-13: HARDNESS CONTOURS  98  FIGURE 5-14: MONITORING SCREEN OF MUCK FLOW FROM PIT TO PILE, H V C  99  FIGURE 5-15: GYRATORY, SEMI-MOBILE, IN-PIT CRUSHER AT H V C  99  FIGURE 5-16: SURGE PILE DIAGRAM  100  FIGURE 5-17: SURGE PILE BLENDING ALGORITHM  100  FIGURE 5-18: A ) WHIPFRAG IMAGE CAPTURE B P WHIPFRAG DELINEATION  102  FIGURE 5-19: WHIPFRAG RESULTS  102  FIGURE 5-20: A C T U A L VS. PREDICTED THROUGHPUT OVER TIME  103  FIGURE 5-21: RECOVERY VS. TIME  104  FIGURE 6-1: METERS DRILLED PER DRILL OVER THE TIME SCALE  116  FIGURE 6-2: ORE GENERATING M O D U L E , E X T E N D ™ SIMULATION  124  FIGURE 6-3: ALTERNATING TRUCK ALLOCATION, E X T E N D ™ SIMULATION  124  FIGURE 6-4: BLENDING ON CRUSHER APRON, E X T E N D ™ SIMULATION  125  FIGURE 6-5: DISTRIBUTIONS OF X , Y AND Z , FOR PILES 1,2 AND 3  126  FIGURE 6-6: DECISION AND CALCULATION M O D U L E FOR IDEAL BLEND  128  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Table of Contents  vin  FIGURE 6-7 : A V E R A G E DEVIATION FOR RUNS FOR PILE 1  129  FIGURE 6-8: DECISION T R E E FOR BLENDING PROJECT  133  FIGURE 6-9: UTILITY C U R V E FOR BLENDING PROJECT  133  FIGURE 6-10: DECISION T R E E CONSIDERING UTILITY  134  FIGURE 9-1: OPTIMAL SOLUTION FOR MINECOMP EXAMPLE  150  FIGURE 9-2: SOLVER WINDOW FOR MINECOMP EXAMPLE  151  FIGURE 9-3: OPTIMAL SOLUTION FOR THE O P M C E X A M P L E  153  FIGURE 9-4: SOLVER WINDOW FOR O P M C E X A M P L E  154  FIGURE 9-5: PLANNED vs. A C T U A L EXPENDITURE  166  FIGURE 9-6: RESULTS FROM A H P EVALUATION  171  4  Table o f E q u a t i o n s  EQUATION 4-1: N E T PRESENT V A L U E  35  EQUATION 4-2: BENEFIT/COST RATIO  36  EQUATION 4-3: INTERNAL R A T E OF RETURN  36  EQUATION 4-4: PAIRWISE COMPARISON MATRIX FOR 3 OBJECTIVES  44  EQUATION 4-5: BLACK-SCHOLES OPTION PRICE  49  EQUATION 4-6: V A L U E OF FLEXIBILITY  53  EQUATION 4-7: V A L U E OF FLEXIBILITY ASSUMING A NORMAL DISTRIBUTION  54  EQUATION 4-8: EXPECTED V A L U E  59  EQUATION 4-9: EXPECTED V A L U E OF DECISION  60  EQUATION 4-10: EQUATION SHOWING BAYESIAN PRINCIPLE  65  EQUATION 4-11: UTITLITY FUNCTION  71  EQUATION 4-12: L A P L A C E DECISION  73  EQUATION4-13: M A X I M A X  74  EQUATION 4-14: MAXIMIN  74  EQUATION 4-15: MINIMAX REGRET  74  EQUATION 6-1: EXTRACTION OF X , Y AND Z FIGURES FROM I B F  127  EQUATION 6-2: PILE HARDNESS EQUATIONS  127  EQUATION 6-3: A V E R A G E ORE HARDNESS FOR STORAGE P I L E X  127  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Table of Contents  5  ix  List of Tables  T A B L E 3-1: MANUFACTURING/MINING COMPARISONS  30  T A B L E 4-1: ECONOMIC VARIABLES FOR PAYBACK E X A M P L E  32  T A B L E 4-2: P A Y B A C K EXAMPLE RESULTS  32  T A B L E 4-3: P A Y B A C K EXAMPLE RESULTS USING DISCOUNT FACTOR  33  T A B L E 4-4: D A T A TO BE USED PW N P V EXAMPLE  35  T A B L E 4-5: N P V EXAMPLE  35  T A B L E 4-6: I R R EXAMPLE DATA  37  T A B L E 4-7: I R R EXAMPLE RESULTS  37  T A B L E 4-8: D A T A FOR MINECOMP EXAMPLE  39  T A B L E 4-9: RESTRICTIONS FOR MINECOMP EXAMPLE  39  T A B L E 4-10: GOALS FOR O P M C EXAMPLE  41  T A B L E 4-11: IMPROVEMENT METHODS FOR O P M C EXAMPLE  41  T A B L E 4-12: WEIGHTED SCORES FOR U M C EXAMPLE  43  T A B L E 4-13: RESULTS OF WEIGHTED A V E R A G E METHOD FOR U M C EXAMPLE  43  T A B L E 4-14: INTERPRETATION OF VALUES IN PAIR WISE COMPARISON MATRIX  44  T A B L E 4-15: OBJECTIVES AND SOLUTION OPTIONS FOR I O M EXAMPLE  45  T A B L E 4-16:RANDOM INDICES FOR CONSISTENCY CHECK  47  T A B L E 4-17: BPNOMIAL PRICE LATTICE FOR GOLD OVER A 10 YEAR PERIOD  51  T A B L E 4-18: V A L U E OF GOLD PRODUCTION (SMILLION) USING GOLD PRICE FLUCTUATIONS AND MINE MODEL 51 T A B L E 4-19: V A L U E OF GOLD PRODUCTION WITH DESIGN MODIFICATION  52  T A B L E 4-20:PAYOFF T A B L E STRUCTURE  58  T A B L E 4-21: PAYOFF EXAMPLE RESULTS  58  T A B L E 4-22: EXPECTED V A L U E EXAMPLE RESULTS  59  T A B L E 4-23: D A T A REQUIRED FOR E V P I CALCULATION  61  T A B L E 4-24: FINANCIAL DATA FOR U N M C EXAMPLE  62  T A B L E 4-25: HISTORICAL D A T A  64  T A B L E 4-26: PRIOR PROBABILITIES  65  T A B L E 4-27: POSTERIOR PROBABILITIES  66  T A B L E 4-28:DECISION ANALYSIS EXAMPLE - MANAGER'S RESPONSES  69  T A B L E 4-29: PERCENTAGES IN T H E CALCULATION OF R  72  T A B L E 4-30: MPNIMAX REGRET SOLUTION  74  T A B L E 5-1: PERCENT OWNERSHIP OF H V C  80  T A B L E 5-2: MATERIAL FLOW T A B L E 5-3: BLENDPNG SUMMARY  97 101  T A B L E 6-1: QUALITATIVE BENEFITS PROMISED r N T H E A F E VS. A C T U A L O U T C O M E  108  T A B L E 6-2: FINANCIAL BENEFITS - RESULTS  112  T A B L E 6-3: FINAL FMANCIAL O U T C O M E  113  T A B L E 6-4: DESIGN COSTS  118  T A B L E 6-5: D A T A REQUIRED FOR A H P APPLICATION  120  T A B L E 6-6: RESULTS FROM T H E A H P EVALUATION  120  T A B L E 6-7: FINAL SCORE FOR H V C - A H P EXAMPLE  120  T A B L E 6-8: SIMULATION DATA ENTRY TABLE  123  T A B L E 6-9: IDEAL BLENDS  126  T A B L E 6-10: EXAMPLE OF POSSIBLE ERRORS GIVEN 5 HARDNESS INCREMENTS  130  T A B L E 6-11: DIVERGENCE FROM IDEAL BLEND AT EXTREME FEED HARDNESS VALUES  131  T A B L E 6-12: NEGLECTED STORAGE PILES  132  T A B L E 6-13: DECISION T R E E PROBABILITIES FOR BLENDING PROJECT  132  T A B L E 6-14: DECISION T R E E NUMERICAL V A L U E S FOR BLENDING PROJECT  133  T A B L E 9-1: D A T A FOR MPNECOMP EXAMPLE  149  T A B L E 9-2: RESTRICTIONS FOR MINECOMP EXAMPLE  149  T A B L E 9-3: GOALS FOR O P M C EXAMPLE  152  T A B L E 9-4: IMPROVEMENT METHODS FOR O P M C EXAMPLE  152  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Table of Contents  x  T A B L E 9-5: A C T U A L VS. PREDICTED COSTS  163  T A B L E 9-6: PREDICTED VS. FINANCIAL BENEFITS  164  T A B L E 9-7: SUMMARY OF FINANCIAL RESULTS, USING CALCULATED, TOTAL BENEFITS  164  T A B L E 9-8: COMPARISON OF QUALITATIVE BENEFITS PROMISED A F E VS. A C T U A L O U T C O M E  167  T A B L E 9-9: FINANCIAL BENEFITS - RESULTS  169  T A B L E 9-10: FINAL FINANCIAL O U T C O M E  170  T A B L E 9-11: OBJECTIVES AND OPTIONS AT TIME OF JUSTIFICATION  170  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  xi  Table of Contents  6  Acknowledgements  Dr. Malcolm Scoble, Dr. M.G. Lipsett, and Dr. Scott Dunbar, for the funds, friendship, guidance, corrections, political view, inspiration, grammar tips, ideas, technical help and direction. Mark Richards, Frank Amon, Brad Aie, Ken Anderson, Dwight Book, Dr. Adrian Dance and Flighland Valley Copper Mine for the opportunity to research this topic in a mining environment. Paul Richard for the industrial connection, comments, encouragement and future vision. Dr. Jonathan Peck for the AQUILA information. Omaia Al-Habbal for the moral support and encouragement to complete this Master of Applied Science degree.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Table of Contents  7  xii  List of Acronyms  49R AC APE AHP AMP B/C BPD BPR CAES CAPM CE CEV CF CI CTM DAS DCF DM EMV EV EVPI FMS GIS GP GPS HVC IP  IRR LAN LHD LP MAP METS MIS MMD NC NPV PB  Bucyrus Erie Rotary Drill 49R Adaptation Costs Application for Expenditure Analytical Hierarchy Process AQUILA Monitoring Platform Benefits costs ratio Business Process Design Business Process Reengineering Computer Aided EarthMoving System Capital Asset Pricing Model Certainty Equivalent Certainty Equivalent Value Cash Flow Consistency Index Computer Integrated Manufacturing Distributed Antenna System Discounted Cash Flow Drill Monitoring Expected Monetary Value Expected Value Expected Value of Perfect Information Flexible Manufacturing Systems Geographical Information System Goal Programing Global Positioning System Highland Valley Copper Integer Programming Internal Rate of Return Local Area Network Load Haul Dump Linear Programming Mining Automation Program Mining and EarthMoving Technology Systems Management Information Systems Moving Map Display Numerically Controlled Net Present Value Payback  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Table of Contents  PLC PM RI ROI ROR RQD  Programmable Logic Controller Preventative Maintenance Random Indices Return on Investment Rate of Return Rock Quality Designation  SAG TQM UBC WAN  Semi-Autogenous Grinding Total Quality Management University of British Columbia Wide Area Network  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  xiii  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 1 - Introduction  1  1  Introduction  Canadian, American and Australian mining industries are currently faced with the requirement to streamline their operations in light of the new economic realities. The lowest commodity prices in decades, competition from the Third World and other low cost producers, and environmental and social constraints are forcing mining companies to move to more profitable business environments and rethink their way of mining. Automation has been seen as a step toward the survival and competitiveness of the industries'.  Several technology related advances in the past 25 years have showed  remarkable promise in improvements in productivity and safety . 2  Technologies relating to  software, automation and communications have been developed and are ready to be transferred into mining operations.  Unfortunately, technology providers seldom have the  expertise or resources to properly transfer technology from the development stage to the productive stage . Mining companies, the potential customers of technology providers, are 3  similarly inexperienced in appraising or implementing these new technologies. The manufacturing industry is experienced in appraising and implementing new technology . 4  This industry has faced many problems similar to those currently facing the mining industry. For example, western manufacturing industries face global competition (low cost producers in Third Torld countries), environmental constraints, and strong labor unions.  The  manufacturing industry realized that improving quality and productivity through new technological tools would allow it to remain competitive. Recent technological innovations evolved beyond simple capacity expansion and moved to information and communications based technologies that provide many benefits such as more efficient turn around, better reaction to market demands and better quality . Outwardly, however, their benefit has not 5  been as evident as replacing 10 men with one machine and economies of scale. Inherent weaknesses in the traditional CIA techniques brought about initial reluctance to implement the technology. Operations management researchers identified the weaknesses in the CIA  ' Mottola, Laura. Systems Analysis for Robotic Mining, Master's Thesis, McGill University, 1996, p.l Vagenas, Nick; Scoble, Malcolm; Baiden, Greg., A review of the first 25 years of mobile machine automation in underground hard rock mines. CIM Bulletin, Vol. 90 no. 1006., January 1997, pp.57-63 Lefebvre, Michel and Andre Piche. Transferring new technologies to operations., CIM Bulletin, Vol. 90 no. 1006., January 1997, p. 68-70. Carrasco, Hector and Shih-Ming Lee, Economics ofAdvanced Manufacturing Systems during System Design and Development, Economics of Advanced Manufacturing Systems, Ed. H.R. Paraei et.al., 1992, Chapman & Hall, p. 37-44 Rhodes, Ed, and David Wield, editors, Implementing New Technologies: Innovation and the Management of Technology, 2 ed., Cornwall: Hartnolls, 1994, p.7 2  3  4  5  nd  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 1 - Introduction  2  methods and developed new methods that more accurately assess the value of the technology 6  . Implementation practices for new technology were also developed.  The weaknesses of the traditional capital appraisal techniques include; focusing on the shortterm profitability and an inability to take qualitative benefits into account. The solution to these problems was to use techniques that take into account more information and to emphasize long term profitability over short term gains. The appraisal and implementation techniques designed for new technology by the manufacturing industry can be carefully adapted for the mining industry by analyzing assumptions, reasoning, and models that form the alternative CIA techniques. These methods allow mine operators and technology providers to better evaluate the impact of new technologies on mining systems. New technologies do not necessarily imply greater complexity or more qualitative benefits. The term new technology, for the purpose of this thesis, is defined as technologies that are not purely capacity expansion, labor saving or replacement of machinery. These alternative CIA methods are to be applied to technologies that improve the safety, quality, and productivity of mining activities through information, communications, intelligent design, and automation. Once technology providers, vendors, and mine operators are familiar with these CIA methods, new technologies can be introduced into mining systems in a more accurate and reliable manner. Implementation is a further significant topic that is important to the success of new technologies in the mining industry; however, since appraisal precedes implementation, this thesis will focus on CIA methods. Implementation, a more complicated and involved topic, constitutes future work. 1.1  Objectives  The primary objective of this thesis is to demonstrate the usefulness of various decisionmaking tools in the appraisal of advanced technologies for the mining industry. Studies at a particular British Columbian mine are provided to demonstrate the applicability of these tools. 1.2  Contributions  Major contributions considered to be made by this thesis include:  Gold, Bela, Charting a Course to Superior Technology Evaluation, Economics ofAdvanced Manufacturing Systems. Economics of Advanced Manufacturing Systems, Ed. H.R. Paraei et.al., Chapman 6  & Hall, p.374  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 1 - Introduction  3  •  A discussion of current mining CIA methodos and a list of definitions of terms frequently used in the thesis (Chapter 2)  •  A classification scheme for new technologies and CIA methods. (Chapter 3)  •  A concise review of CIA methods used by the manufacturing industry and a discussion of changes required for use in evaluating new mining technologies for the mining industry. (Chapters 3 and 4)  •  Numerical examples of potential new CIA methods, both contrived and practical. (Chapters 4 and 5)  1.3  Methodology  Between September 1997 and December 1998, the author undertook this research study in the University of British Columbia's Mining and Mineral Process Engineering Department. The work was completed under the supervision of Dr. Malcolm Scoble and assisted by Dr. Scott Dunbar and Dr. Mike Lipsett. Several work periods were spent at the Highland Valley Copper mine, in British Columbia, to collect data for the case studies and interact with mine personel. 1.4  Thesis Structure  Chapter l introduces the present work and lists the major contributions and methodology, and describes each chapter. Chapter 2 provides definitions for important terms used throughout the thesis, and reviews the current managerial practices relating to technology justification by various mining companies. Chapter 3 dicusses the reasoning for using operations management tools developed for the manufacturing industry for advanced manufacturing technology, as justification aids for the acquisition of new technology in the mining industry. Similarities between the mining and manufacturing industries are reviewed. This chapter concludes by classifying technologies and CIA methods into three separate levels based on technological attributes. Chapter 4 reviews tools available for justification purposes, and provides examples. The chapter is organized according to the classification scheme introduced in the previous chapter. Chapter 5 provides background information for chapter 6 on the Highland Valley Copper mine and the technologies under study.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 1 - Introduction  4  Chapter 6 reviews practical examples o f the justification o f GPS and information-based technologies at the Highland Valley Copper mine, an open-pit copper mine.  The results of  two case studies are presented along with the reasoning behind the conclusions. Chapter 7 offers conclusions and recommendations for future work.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 2 - Definitions & Reasoning  2  5  Definitions & Reasoning  The first section of this chapter defines terms that are frequently used throughout the thesis. This lays the groundwork for the second section, which reveals the inadequacies of current financial justification and implementation methodologies in mining companies and technology developers. It also reviews several technologies developed in Canada that are ready for implementation but have yet to be accepted by the industry. The third section shows that management techniques, widely accepted by mine administration personnel, do not allow proper assessment of the potential of the new technologies. 2.1  Definitions  Consider the terms found in the title: 'Capital Investment Appraisal for Advanced Mining: Case Studies in GPS and Information Based Surface Mining Technology'. Appraise - "Fix price of, estimate" . 7  Justify - "Show the justice or truth of (person, act, statement, claim); be adequate ground for, warrant' . 8  The CIA methods investigated in this study are assessment techniques that are new to the mining industry. Before a technology, equity stock, or piece of equipment is purchased, there must be reasoning being the acquisition. The appraisal or justification can be financial, technical, environmental or safety related. In this thesis, manufacturing CIA methods are identified and adapted to suit the mining industry for the purpose of providing the mining industry a method of evaluating new technology in a more precise way. Technology - In this thesis this term represents the technology utilizing information and communications based tools. Some technologies have been developed for other industries while others have been exclusively for mining. New technology can be traditional, capacity expansion or automation (labor replacement) machinery. A classification scheme is provided in the next chapter that defines the various technology levels. These justification studies do not only apply to surface mining automation technologies. Surface mining automation is the focus of this thesis because the practical examples relate to technologies under consideration at the Highland Valley Copper open pit mine, in British Columbia.  Fowler, F.G. and Fowler, H. W. The Pocket Oxford Dictionary of Current English., 4 ed., Oxford University Press, London, 1961 Fowler, F.G. and Fowler, H.W. The Pocket Oxford Dictionary of Current English., 4 ed., Oxford University Press, London, 1961 7  th  8  th  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  6  Chapter 2 - Definitions & Reasoning  2.2  Inadequacies  Mining engineering university programs and mine management textbooks do not appear to teach or even mention non-financial CIA methods. Traditional CIA methods are adequate for most capital asset acquisitions; however, as these new technologies present more important benefits, the value of knowing the proper CIA method becomes similarly important. For example, the international mining automation symposia have been held for over a decade but relatively few mines have implemented the technologies presented at the conferences. Consider tele-remote LHDs, which have been available since the mid-1990s: no mine operations (other than the mines used for the development of the technologies) use the technology. The few mining companies that have developed mining automation technology in-house have yet to have marred success in integrating such technology into their operations. A possible reason for this lack of success is the lack of adequate justification to management. If top management support is uncertain, the support of others in the organization is lacking and therefore the implementation will suffer . The requirement of an adequate justification is the first step toward implementation, both for reasons of investing in the technology and in gaining support for its eventual implementation. 9  10  11  2.3  Reasons for the Inadequacy  of Traditional  Justification  Schemes  Assuming that justification of new technologies is one of the most important challenges faced by mine management, why are traditional CIA methods inadequate. One basic problem is that many of the technology benefits are more strategic, such as improved flexibility, manpower efficiency, engineering quality, and planning. The business case for implementation is difficult to quantify when using traditional financial CIA methods. Management in both mining and manufacturing has historically justified purchases on the basis of cost reduction or capacity expansion as the ultimate solutions to improve an operation. For example, haul truck size has grown so much in the last decade that the size of a truck is now limited by the tire design. Furthermore, the incremental capital cost of additional payload is becoming less attractive (eventually economies of scale break down). Formal economic justification techniques have defended this trend due to their focus on short-term gain and quantity over quality. There are several historical patterns that exacerbate this predicament. Thefirsthistorical pattern that assails both the mining and manufacturing industry's inability to see beyond traditional CIA methods is the current misconception that technology always  Author asked 8 mining studentsfrom4 universities questions which indicated that exclusively, financial justification techniques are taught Sloan & Gentry - referred to further within the thesis Sloan, Douglas A.. Mine Management, London; Chapman & Hall, 1983, p. 135 9  10 11  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 2 - Definitions & Reasoning  7  leads to a reduction in labor . It should however, lead to higher productivity (or profit) per employee and unit of capital cost employed. Employment opportunities will also tend to be more technical in nature, where computer-programming skills are more valuable than (human) physical exertion. A reduction in labor due to technology may have occurred in the past, however, due to the increased information flow from processes several benefits have been achieved. For example, benefits such as improved safety, lead-time, flexibility, and quality may allow mines to operate more efficiently and profitably. Taylor, the father of modern scientific management, argues that increasing productivity actually creates jobs. For example, if the price of the finished product decreases, the demand for that product increases, thereby the industry must grow to fill the increased demand. However, considering this thesis is focused on the mineral industry, where a single mine cannot control the price of commodities, Taylor's reasoning is not applicable. 12  13  14  15  16  A second impediment that makes new information based technology difficult to justify is the professional evaluation structure of some firms. In mostfirms,managers are promoted on their ability to show improvement in their respective departments. Therefore managers may be less interested in projects that are better in the long run or for the overall company since they will not directly to reap the benefits. New technologies have been suggested whose benefits and costs, once implemented, are not easily quantified. These new technologies focus on more efficient information management and improved quality and effectiveness. But these new, more integrated technologies cannot be justified by simple economic methods used to justify cost reduction or capacity expansion technologies. Integrated technology calls for a method of justification that takes into account qualitative benefits. An increase in the productivity in mining due to technology has lead to a lower proportion of direct labor in the unit cost of production but can sometimes lead to an increase in workers involved in support services (i.e. mechanics, computer technicians). 17  The problems and misconceptions of justifying advanced technology have been addressed by the manufacturing industry through years of research in operations management . Industry experts have debated the use and applicability of various CIA methods, which vary in complexity. Mining can use these CIA methods to justify advanced mining technologies that have characteristics similar to advanced manufacturing technologies, such as longer payback 18  Meredith, Jack R. and Marianne Hill. Justifying New Manufacturing Systems: A Managerial Approach., Sloan Management Review, Summer 1987. p. 49 Example: time to bring a plan, such as a blasting pattern, into the finished product. Example: ability to change grade, by mining a different stope, when mill requests such a change. Example: better fragmentation or better engineering plans. Taylor, Frederick Winslow, The Principles of Scientific Management, New York: Harper & Row, 1911, p. 1-30 Meredith, and Hill, Ibid., p.50 Kulatilaka, Nalin, Financial, economic and strategic issues concerning the decision to invest in advanced automation., International Journal of Production Research., vol.22 n.6., 1984., p.950 12  13  14  15  16  1 7  18  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 2 - Definitions & Reasoning  8  periods and qualitative benefits. However, these methods must be modified for application to mining. Advanced manufacturing technology has allowed that industry to introduce technology as a strategic competitive tool. For example, instead of producing a large volume of a specific product, flexible-manufacturing technology has allowed the manufacturing industry to produce small, quality oriented groups of products by responding quickly to changes in market demand. This type of strategic advantage is not relevant to the mining industry in its current mode of operation; therefore, not all CIA methods devised by the manufacturing industry for justifying advanced technology are appropriate for the mining industry.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  3  9  Classification of Technologies and CIA methods  The present work considers methods to justify advanced mining technologies by adapting the methods devised by the manufacturing industry, to suit the advanced technologies of the mining industry. This chapter introduces CIA methods used in manufacturing, and then considers their modification for mining. As the level of complexity and integration increases, the benefits from the technology become more qualitative and increasingly difficult to quantify . As the level of integration of the new technology increases, the justification techniques best suited for that technology also become more complicated and strategically orientated. Classification schemes for the manufacturing industry have been devised to determine the appropriate CIA methods for a certain level of technology integration. This chapter develops a mining version of this classification scheme. 19  3.1  Classification  Scheme  As described in Meredith and Hill (1985) and Meredith and Suresh (1986), new manufacturing technologies vary from stand-alone equipment to full computer-integrated manufacturing (CIM) systems. In the manufacturing industry, stand-alone automated equipment includes robots and numerically controlled (NC) machine tools. Such equipment replaces worn out or obsolete equipment. When design, planning, materials handling, manufacturing, and support systems are all linked together through computer control, the factory is a CIM system. The ultimate result of such an architecture is to fundamentally change the method of manufacturing. Similarly, in the mining industry, technology can vary between a new piece of standard equipment to a complex integrated system. An example of acquiring a new piece of equipment is the purchase of a modern truck or a new dozer. The benefits and costs achieved are easily calculated and known. Examples of integrated systems in the mining industry are integrated dispatch and management information systems (MIS) and real-time monitoring systems. One of the most integrated systems available is a real-time production monitoring system, the Computer Aided EarthMoving System (CAES) by Caterpillar Inc . These 20  Soni, Ramesh G; Parsaei, Hamid R., and Donald H. Liles. Economic and Financial Justification Methods for Advanced Automated Manufacturing: An Overview., From: Economics of Advanced Mnufacturing Systems., editor: Parsaei, H.R. and Mital, A., Chapman & Hall., 1992., p. 3 The roots of the Caterpillar's integrated mining system may be in the advanced manufacturing technology adopted by Caterpillar's manufacturing facilities. When Caterpillar adopted flexible manufacturing systems (FMS) in its manufacturing facilities, the company enjoyed several benefits that were not accounted for in its economic evaluation. From the experience, the company currently evaluates advanced technology using modified or different evaluation criteria and techniques. As discussed in: Gold, Bela,. Charting a Course to Superior Technology Evaluation, Sloan Management Review, Fall, 1988 Iy  2 0  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  10  integrated technologies have not yet been widely accepted and the full range of their true costs and benefits (both qualitative and quantitative) has yet to be proven. According to Meredith and Suresh, there are three main characteristics of these more integrated, information-based technologies that make the justification process more complex than those used for less complex technologies: flexibility, qualitative attributes and risk. 21  Thefirstcharacteristic is that these technologies can potentially increase the flexibility of the system. They can increase the ability to perform manufacturing or mining more dynamically. As an added benefit, some argue that this flexibility maintains the value of the equipment for a greater period of time, rather than letting its value depreciate . A further benefit can be achieved when changes in the business structure required to take advantage of the flexibility, allow businesses to re-evaluate their operating practices (to make improvements). Although, this change in business structure may increase the level of risk involved in the proposed project. 22  The second, more important characteristic that makes the justification process more complex is the many qualitative attributes of these integrated systems. In manufacturing, users of CIM consistently report qualitative benefits from linked systems. The benefits include greater flexibility in product turnaround and better quality. These benefits are difficult to quantify financially because they cannot be separated from other business activities. At present, few truly integrated systems exist in operating mines, although, some moderately integrated systems such as a computer controlled dispatch system do provide qualitative benefits, such as improved supervision and more efficient scheduling (both for equipment allocation and maintenance). If these qualitative benefits can be accounted for in the economic justification, a significant increase in the calculated return on investment can be demonstrated . 23  The third characteristic that makes the justification process more challenging is the risk involved in implementing the integrated technologies. The risk, particularly for manufacturing, is not only financial but also organizational, since the entire company infrastructure must often be changed to obtain the full benefits that these systems offer. At first glance it appears as though the mining industry does not face the same severity of risk, when implementing these technologies, as the manufacturing industry; the average mine life is shorter than the life of most manufacturing companies. During the construction of a new mine, a new operational system devised with these technologies in mind, can be formulated and implemented. Designing and implementing a new technology into a green field site is Meredith and Suresh, Justification Techniques for advanced manufacturing technologies., vol. 24 no.5, International Journal of Production Research., 1986, p. 1044 Gold, B., CAM sets new rules for production. Harvard Business Review, November-December, 1982 Meredith, J.R., 1985a, The economics of computer integrated manufacturing. In Nazemetz, J.W., Hammer, Jr., W.E. and R.P. Sadowski. Computer Integrated Manufacturing Systems: Selected Readings (Institute of Industrial Engineers, Norcross, Georgia, U.S.A.) 21  2 2 23  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  11  less challenging than attempting to change an existing operation. Risk can be further mitigated by adopting technology already developed for other industrial sectors and by designing flexibility into the system for possible expansion or modification in open systems. This apparent advantage over the manufacturing industry is a deception since mining has traditionally been slow to accept new technologies, as discussed in chapter 2. Technologies can be classified into different categories depending on their level of integration into the overall system. For example, a new truck contributes a certain benefit to the production rate of the mine and exacts a certain cost in terms of capital and operating costs over its working life. In contrast, a drilling technology that integrates the engineering office closer to the blast pattern and geology may potentially impact processing costs, engineering costs and drilling costs thereby optimizing the blasting sequence. Therefore a classification scheme would be convenient, so that evaluators can easily determine what CIA methods would be most applicable. 3.2  Three justification categories  Meredith and Suresh separate new manufacturing technologies into three separate categories based on the degree of integration of the technology within the production system. The figure below shows the diagram used to represent this distinction. Stand-Alone  Linked  Integrated  I  1  1  Robots NC  FMS  CIM  Figure 3-1: Advanced manufacturing technology continuum  Stand-Alone  Linked  Integrated  I  1  1  Drill Truck  24  GPS assisted drilling CAES-assisted ore blending  Figure 3-2: Advanced mining technology continuum  For stand-alone systems, where the purpose of the purchase is simply the replacement of old equipment, the standard economic justification approaches can be used. When a moderate amount of synergy (from linked cells, or a few linked pieces of equipment), flexibility, risk and non-economic benefits are present, more analytical methods are required. When considering systems that approach full integration, with clear competitive advantages and a major commitment towards business objectives, more strategic approaches are needed. Tactical and economic benefits must play a role in this last category, but not a dominant one.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  12  Each of the three justification categories covers a great variety of approaches, as seen in the figure below. This diagram represents the suggested justification techniques for certain levels of integration. | Justification A p p r o a c h e s | bconomic  [  Analytic  - Payback  ,1  Value Analysis -ROI IRR  I  Non-nu^neric"^^^™^™™™  MAPI NPV  -  Portfolio analysis  "T"  Risk A n a l y s i s  |- technical importance  Scoring  Programming  |- business objectives  - sacred c o w  • unweighted 0-1  - operating necessity  • unweighted  I  - weighted  ^^trajegic  I- linear - integer  |  competitive advantage  -goal  - AHP  Figure 3-3: CIA methods  Meredith and Hill classified the technologies into four groups. The diagram below reveals how CIA methods should be chosen for the appropriate level of technology. According to Meredith and Hill, the four levels were also separated according to their level of integration. 25  Mining technologies suit the original three-level technology classification scheme more accurately, as is explained later in this section. The next few subsections provide the analysis so that a mining version of these technology levels can be formulated, providing a classification scheme for mining technologies for selecting appropriate CIA methods. The analysis is a threefold process. A description of the manufacturing version of the technology level is given, with examples. Finally, the justification schemes that are appropriate for that level of technology are listed, along with any omissions due to incompatibility with mining.  Meredith and Suresh, Ibid., p. 1044 Meredith and Hill, Ibid p. 52  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  Techniques  Examples  Economic  Payback ROI NPV Cash Flow  Portfolio  Programming Models Scoring Models Growth Options  Analytic  Value Analysis Risk Analysis  Strategic  Technical Importance Business Objectives Competitive Advantage R&D  13  Level 1  Level 2  Level 3  Level 4  Stand Alone  Cells  Linked Island  Full integration  Useful  Figure 3-4: Justification Approaches for Advanced Manufacturing Systems, after Meredith and Hill  26  3.2.1 Level 1 3.2.1.1 Level 1: Manufacturing - Stand Alone Systems  This level of manufacturing technology is mainly machinery that is usually controlled by self-contained computers or programmable logic controllers (PLCs). Examples of this type of equipment are numerically controlled (NC) machine tools and robots. This type of equipment requires only limited information. Stand alone systems are the most common type of manufacturing automation. When stand-alone systems are purchased, their intended use is usually to simply achieve better efficiency, higher speed (through faster production rates, thereby lower costs) or replace worn-out equipment. There is usually little risk involved in this type of acquisition since the technology is generally known and understood. Since the purpose and implementation of these systems is well understood, common economic methods of justification are adequate. The benefits of employing these purely financial CIA methods are their simplicity, clarity and data requirements. Valuing the direct cost savings and determining the affected variables can be easily performed. Ancillary savings such as decreased set-up labor or maintenance can also be calculated but with less precision.  Meredith and Hill, Ibid., p.53  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  14  3.2.1.2 Level 1 - Mining - Production Units  After analyzing the definition of this level of manufacturing technology, a mining equivalent can be approximated. The benefit of acquiring a new piece of equipment such as a new haul truck, with increased capacity and lower fuel consumption, can be easily estimated with common economic tools. Ancillary benefits, such as lower maintenance or increased speed can be estimated with moderate accuracy. The exact benefits and costs can be easily calculated since the technology is known and its effects are understood. This level of integration of these types of technology, into the mining process is similar to those of the level 1 technologies for the manufacturing industry. The following is a list of mining equipment and service-oriented units that can also be considered as equivalent to stand-alone technologies: •  New equipment such as haul trucks, dozers, shovels, drills or loaders  • More or improved labor such as master blasters, more experienced shovel operators Shovels may appear to be more integrated into the overall system than haul trucks since fleet management is usually organized around the most important pieces of equipment. The capacity of NC machine tools have to be similarly matched with the down and up-stream processes within the manufacturing process. The effects can be accounted for through operations research (OR). For example, OR has provided tools such as capacity planning, for manufacturing, and queuing theory for fleet management, these effects can be accounted for. 3.2.1.3 Level 1 - Economic CIA methods  Most industries use the same basic economic tools for this level of justification. Both the mining and manufacturing industries use methods such as payback period, ROI and various DCF techniques. There are some pitfalls that make these justification approaches inappropriate for many technologies. The first deals with hurdle rates. When employing these economic justification techniques, managers use hurdle rates to pass judgement on a proposed project. Hurdle rates can include a maximum payment period, a minimum return on investment, or a high discount rate. For example, if a project has a longer payback period than the minimum allowable period specified by the company (or manager), then the project may be rejected. These hurdle rates are considered to be management's method of reducing risk or ensuring profitability. Risk is an important consideration when investing in advanced technology. New technology, even by definition, is not usually widely accepted. Managers protect themselves from perceived risk by increasing the level of profitability required for project acceptance. Hurdle rates and risk are widely debated by the pundits of the manufacturing industry. Three Sean Dessureault  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  15  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  perspectives on economic justification are provided in this section to take into account the importance of these topics when performing the justification phase of an application for expenditure. 3.2.1.3.1 Simulation over blanket hurdle rates for New Technology Hundy and Hamblin (1988) argue that current methodologies for financial analysis employed by most manufacturing firms (in late eighties to early nineties) are counter productive and are contributing to the West falling behind countries such as Japan. This situation is being rectified in the manufacturing industry, however, the mining industry still relies on increasing hurdle rates as a protection against risk. Hundy and Hamblin consider financial analysis essential for investments. They argue that financial CIA methods can take account of longerterm strategic aims provided that the acceptance criteria are well understood and applied flexibly. It is also recognized that those who are in a position to assess the benefits must undertake the evaluation. Hundy and Hamblin argue that the hurdle rates should consist of the cost of capital of the firm. The cost of capital can be assessed by determining the cost of borrowing money on the market, raising venture capital or by using methods that take an objective view of risk such as the Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM). Therefore no added risk element should be added to the hurdle rates. Computers with simulation programming aids, such as spreadsheets, should be used to test the sensitivity of projects to apparent risk rather than blanket application of hurdle rates. Simulators allow more intelligent and customized approach that can take into account the true situation, provided that both the model and data are accurate. 3.2.1.3.2 Acceptable level of Risk & Management's personal attitude towards risk. Frank Lefley (1997), discusses risk in four main steps. •  Analyses of the nature of risk.  •  Determines the acceptable level of risk.  •  Discusses management's personal attitude towards risk.  •  Identifies the techniques used in the assessment of risk and provides example of how these techniques can be used to take risk into account.  Lefley discusses the use of hurdle rates and how to properly incorporate a calculated risk factor, which is somewhat objective, into financial CIA methods. Due to the risk evaluation aspect, this approach will be discussed in the level 3 CIA methods since that section deals  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  16  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  with risk; however, it is important to note that this section does refer to financial CIA methods, albeit a risk-altered form of these methods. 3.2.1.3.3 Financial Analysis Paramount Ashford (1988) counters much of the criticism of using financial CIA methods for new technology by stating that the basic axioms of the methods are sound, however, they (the financial techniques) are commonly misapplied. He states that risk must be accepted because 'risk is a part of business'. Ashford emphasizes the use of financial appraisal techniques, because these are the techniques that the business world most understands. The author begins by enumerating the main criticisms offinancialjustification techniques: 1. The techniques undervalue long term effects. 2. The viewed industrial activity is much too static, underrating the effects and pace of technological change. 3. There are benefits from these technologies that are difficult to quantify and are often ignored in the appraisal process. 4. The systems of management control in large organizations compound the bias against the long term. Ashford argues that it is not the methods themselves that cause these problems but the method of application. He gives suggestions on how to correct for these problems. These suggestions are summarized here. 1. Undervaluation of long term effects According to Ashford, traditional appraisal methods such as the payback method undervalue long term effects. However, he states that manager's reliance on this value should be considerably diminished since it is only a 'rule of thumb', never to be used as a safeguard against risk. It should only be considered as simple measure but managers should acknowledge that it is insensitive to variation among projects and that it takes no account of the long-term advantages. Similarly, Ashford agrees that discounting methods such as the net present value (NPV) and internal rate of return (IRR) also under-emphasize the future benefits of new technology. These problems can be further exacerbated by the application of a risk premium; however, he rebukes that arguments against discounting should rest purely on the magnitude of the discount factor used. Ashford encourages the use of the Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) to calculate the real cost of capital. CAPM is used by financial markets to determine the appropriate return, which is directly proportional to the risk (within the CAPM model). Therefore real estimates of cash flows can be discounted using real capital costs instead of inflated capital costs.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  17  2. Assumptions about the future Usually, when carrying out traditional investment appraisal, it is assumed that without a particular investment project, the company can operate as before, industry costs remain the same, and the demand stays unchanged. Ashford argues that these assumptions are incorrect: those markets are dynamic. He advocates that the correct approach is to make forecasts or scenarios of the environment that is incorporated into both the base-case and new technology appraisals 3. Qualitative benefits ignored Ashford agrees that the current method of appraisal ignores many of the qualitative benefits derived from new technology. He states that the main reason for these omissions is that these benefits are difficult (but not impossible) to quantify. With more vigilance, effort, and knowledge of all processes that the new technology will affect, it is possible to determine quantitative values of the qualitative benefits; however, such an appraisal will take more time, effort, and estimation. Some estimates will not be as precise as required, but quantification is possible. 4. Management Control Ashford placed a great deal of emphasis on the role of management. Large organizations usually organize their reward system in such a way that managers are rewarded for projects that yield short-term benefits. Those who control the company place less emphasis on longterm benefits. Furthermore, managers are more likely to approve those projects that yield the bulk of their benefits while they are still in their posts, or in their department. Ashford resolves that the only way of remedying this problem is by altering the reward system by commending the managers who promote projects that yield a higher profitability for the entire company to maximize profitability in the long run. This method will also ensure that 'stop-gap' solutions to long term problems do not take precedence. W. Edwards Demming, considered to be the main inspiration for of quality management , also condemned the use of arbitrary numerical goals. Demming created a list of 14 points that managers should follow to ensure high quality and proper working conditions. Point 10 ("Eliminate arbitrary numerical goals, posters and slogans for the workforce which seek new levels of productivity without providing the methods.") and point 11 ("Eliminate work standards and numerical quotas." ) both condemn the use of numerical goals for management. 27  28  Shafer, Scott M. and Jack R. Meredith. Operations Management: A process Approach., John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1998., p. 76 Demming, W. Edwards., Quality, Productivity and Competitive Position., Cambridge-MIT, Massachusetts, 1982., p.16-17 2 8  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  18  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  It is understood that the above management control suggestions refer to line management. These arguments, for the purpose of this thesis, are focused toward those who make investment decisions. 3.2.1.3.4 Conclusion to Financial CIA methods There are several recurring conclusions in the analyses undertaken by the authors mentioned above; 1. Hurdle rates should be applied in an intelligent and per-case basis while understanding the true nature of the base case (understand the true nature of the market) 2. When discounting, the real cost of capital should be used 3. Risk should be evaluated separately, usually using simulation (see section 4.3.3:Risk Analysis) 4. Management philosophy and characteristics should be known, understood and planned for. An example of how to apply changes in hurdle rates or the base-case, based on an actual situation is presented in the next chapter. The method of calculating the true cost of capital using the CAPM and a formal method is provided below. Risk and simulation is discussed in the 'analytic justification' section of this chapter. Finally, management philosophy and characteristics is not within the scope of this thesis however, it is an important aspect of justification and should be explored by the interested reader. 3.2.2 Level 2 3.2.2.1 Level 2: Manufacturing - Cells According to Meredith and Hill, level 2 systems for manufacturing have: 29  "...a higher level of interaction and communication. Typically, they consist of multiple pieces of individual, Level 1 equipment, placed or connected in a 'cellular' configuration to perform multiple but ordinary tasks on a family of parts. This cell accomplishes a variety of functions, largely through the ability of the integrated information system."  For manufacturing firms, the main purpose of implementing this type of system is to facilitate a change in the firm's product mix, capacity, quality and/or lead-time. Flexibility and quality are the main strategies behind this action. Some moderate organizational change is required to reduce the risk of possible incompatibility and increased interfaces and coordination. A manufacturing example of this type of technology is a Flexible Manufacturing System (FMS), where an automated material handling system interconnects several NC machine tools.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  19  3.2.2.2 Analysis of Mining as a Muck Factory  The mining equivalent of level 2 technology is approached by different views. A brief analysis of a mine will be made in terms of an ore, infrastructure and waste dump building factory. There is a dual purpose behind the analysis. Firstly, the analysis will expose the similarities between the manufacturing and mining processes. Secondly, the value of integrating the processes will be demonstrated. A process may be defined as the group or series of activities that must be completed to produce a result that has value to a customer . Processes haveflowsof material, energy and information that ideally are combined in the most efficient way to produce the final valuable result. 30  For the purpose of the analysis, the main objective of a mine is assumed to be to produce ore for the mill. There are several processes such as exploration, production and servicing operations that must be performed before the final product is consumed in the mill. Therefore the mill is the mine's only customer. It is therefore assumed that these processes must be optimized for the customer in mind, for highest possible overall profit and reduced costs (so that the customer in turn can sell the processed product even cheaper). However in most mines, very little effort is placed on determining the overall effect of variations in the mine's processes and product (crushed rock) on the mill. This is mainly due to the lack of competition, since the mine on site has the only ore the mill can 'purchase'. As will be discussed, this level of technology will give the mine the option to optimize the various processes to improve such aspects as engineering, safety, costs (to a lesser degree directly) and the consistency of the quality of the product (ore) by integrating the processes. 3.2.2.2.1 Exploration An exploration or geology department must accurately delineate the orebody and determine the various grade concentrations. Then a planning department, using the product from the geology department, outlines a general plan that will allow the least expensive extraction possible, taking safety and environmental restrictions into consideration. An example of a mining technology that integrates the exploration and primary planning phase is a Geographical Information System (GIS). The numerous benefits that come with the better visualization brought by a GIS are very difficult to quantify, and so customary financial CIA methods are clearly inappropriate. These first two phases in the mining process are analogous to the planning phases of a manufacturing firm. In manufacturing, a marketing firm explores the possible needs of Meredith and Hill, Ibid. Shafer, et. al. Ibid, p.l 10  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  20  consumers. A planning department then outlines a general factory plan layout that will allow the least expensive assembly possible, taking into account local labor and environmental variables. 3.2.2.2.2 Production The production cycle of a mine can be viewed in three steps; the design, rock fragmentation, and materials handling. Before the ore can be blasted, the blast pattern must be designed, taking local geology and the long-term plan into account (there are many other variables, but for the purpose of simplicity, only these will be discussed). The variable nature of geology is a factor that makes daily planning part of the production process for a mine. The planning (blasthole layout, burden & spacing, and explosives selection) and drilling of a blast pattern can be viewed as a single process in the production of muck (the fragmentation step in the production cycle). Therefore if the process were more integrated, improvements in design, planning and execution would be achievable. In some mines, further plans are formulated from information gathered during the drilling phase. This is information that can be used when planning for the second phase: blasting. Therefore planning can again be considered to be part of the overall production process and would most likely benefitfromincreased integration. The third and final materials handling phase also requires planning. Haul routes are planned and trucks are dispatched by a computer or an individual that undertakes the planning (with the goal of optimizing production). This phase also requires further planning (for grade control or blending purposes) since the desired characteristics of the product depend on the demands of the mill. If a certain grade or fragmentation distribution must be achieved, planning will be needed. Increased information flow due to greater integration may allow the mine planning staff to optimize various processes to improve safety, quality or even costs. Manufacturing also requires planning. The ideal factory layout, the best connections between the various machines, and the optimum product mix are all goals that must be planned. For example, the flexibility of certain machines allows the factory to easily change the operation to produce the most profitable product in a changing marketplace. The marketing department (through consumer research) determines what that product and price point is, and these technologies allow the processes to be optimized to produce the desired product for the consumer. These manufacturing technologies are similar to mining technologies in that both allow a process to be optimized for a consumer. The consumer can be the next minor process (such as creating the optimum blast pattern to help ground engaging by the shovel) or the next major process (such as delivering the ideal blend of ore to the mill).  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  21  3.2.2.2.3 Discussion of the Analysis There are two main purposes to the discussion above. The first objective is to show that in some respects, a mine is very similar to a factory in the sense that certain technologies can be used to optimize the processes for the consumer. For example, the quality of the blasting department's product directly influences the consumers, the loading and ground engaging department (if the fragmentation quality is poor, the loading cycle will be bogged down with lower productivity and higher maintenance costs). The quality of a mine's product depends on the demand of its consumer, the mill. Frequently, a mill demands the particular grade and fragmentation distribution that optimizes the profitability of the operation. These quality issues should be the primary objectives of a mine planner. The second objective of the analysis is to demonstrate the necessity for flexibility in design and in processes. Flexibility is often listed as one of the main benefits of advanced manufacturing technology. Manufacturingfirmscontend with potentially variable sources of materials and many finicky consumers whose definition of quality varies, whereas a mining engineer contends with a variable geology. To ensure quality, planners in both industries must contend with variables that are dynamic. Flexibility in design and options would allow these variables to be handled easily. 3.2.3 Level 2 Mining - Integrated process The analysis above drafted an example of a mining equivalent of level 2 manufacturing technologies. As was mentioned above, a mining process such as drilling requires several steps. Similarly, a manufacturing process requires several steps. Level 2 technologies in the manufacturing industry provide an information flow between the steps to allow an improved quality through a more flexible and precise process. An equivalent mining technology would also require an increased information flow between the steps to improve quality through flexibility and precision. An example of process flexibility (for mining) is the ability to change the blast pattern design, due to new geological data, without greatly increasing the lead-time. Flexibility and autonomy would also provide a safer working environment since most information gathering and distribution in mining is conducted by technicians. For example, instead of sending a technician to delineate with stakes (by climbing on a loose muck pile) the general area of a miss-fire, a GPS location and readout on the shovel would tell the operator the precise location. An example of an integrated process is the drill-monitoring package offered by Aquila Mining Systems. The positioning component of the technology allows the operator to drill holes with greater accuracy, improving fragmentation. It also improves the process speed since manual surveying is not required. The consistency of design is another improvement  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  22  over the base case. These three aspects, accuracy, speed, and consistency, improve the quality of the product (the muck) by improving the fragmentation, reducing the cost and shortening the lead-time. The integrated aspect of this system is the more efficient link between surveying (which is no longer a component since no surveying is needed), planning and drilling operations. For example, the system links the engineering blast pattern design directly to the drill by simply downloading the design into the on-board monitoring system. Other useful information that is linked from the machine to the mine office is the geological information or maintenance report that is automatically generated by the instrumentation on the drill. The geological information is collected automatically by the monitoring platform from instruments on the drill-string that measure vibration and mechanical drill parameters (an algorithm is used to determine the geological parameters). This information can then be downloaded into the mine information system to upgrade the geological survey of the areas. This in turn may be used to optimize the blast pattern and sequencing. It can be seen that this also has a measure of flexibility: the ease with which information can be collected and sent to the drill, the different design options available and availability of technicians who were previously surveying. The design flexibility is the ease with which the blast pattern can change, given new information. 3.2.4 Level 2 CIA methods It is customary to employ level 2 technologies for their broader, less tangible benefits therefore a justification procedure that can harness these benefits is needed. Several CIA methods are suggested, including linear, integer, and goal programming (programming models), scoring models, the Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP), and option pricing. All of the methods mentioned here will be explained and examples provided in a further subsection. It is important to note that these methods should be complemented with the common economic evaluation techniques; however, their results should not govern the manager's decision. 3.2.5 Level 3 According to the definition provided by Meredith and Hill, level 2 technology is more local: it integrates a single process closer to other processes but does not affect multiple processes. For example, the AQUILA technology discussed above integrates the muck producing process by increasing the information flow between the various activities within the process. Level 2 technology does not integrate processes together such as blasting and hauling. Level 3 does integrate individual processes together. Level 3 technologies are typically more expensive, in terms of initial capital cost, than level 2 technologies, require a significant  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  23  amount of organizational restructuring, and affect more than a single process. Project failure or improper implementation may incur significant loss or labor relation breakdowns. Therefore, risk is an important factor when considering level 3 technology. 3.2.5.1 Level 3: Manufacturing - Linked Islands  The third level of technology integration for the manufacturing industry is a set of cells that are connected to form linked islands through an information network. At this level of integration, substantial changes in organizational structure are needed, because many processes and business departments are affected by the technology. Integrated manufacturing allows even more flexibility than level 2 technologies. There are two main advantages to this increased level of flexibility. The first advantage is the ability to easily and quickly generate new types of products to enter new markets or to conform to a change in customer demand. The second advantage is to bring synergy to the production process . These are regarded as barriers to entry for protection against competitors. 31  3.2.5.2 Level 3: Mining - Total Mine Integration  Competitive advantage and entry barriers are not valid benefits within business units of a single mining property. The mill, the only consumer of the mine product, is usually on-site and owned by the same company, therefore no competition exits. Quality, an entry barrier is important in mine production but it is not the governing concern of mine managers. The balance between quality and costs is vague, where the costs of the mill are directly linked to the mine product. The main question of this dilemma is: where do the costs of good muck and grade distribution rise above the savings at the mill? A similar dilemma can be seen within the mining process itself: where do the costs of better engineering and management rise above the savings of the improved activities in the operations sphere and how are they coupled? Determining this critical balance is not the purpose of this study, but it is important to mention these unresolved issues. Quality may be an important aspect of a mine's product but the immediate result of improved quality is difficult to measure and is therefore usually ignored by the mine. The only advantage at this level of technology integration common to both mining and manufacturing is the synergy produced when information flows freely between most processes. The option to study information flows allows engineering departments within the mine and mill the ability to optimize various processes and not simply a local variable. To the author's knowledge, no mines, at present, use this level of integration. Therefore the advantage of level 3 technologies to the mining industry is the potential to optimize the overall process on a strategic scale. An example of strategic, large-scale optimization is the 31  Meredith and Hill, Ibid, p.55  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  24  decreased inventory requirements if technology could keep track of all consumables in the mine. A further example of strategic optimization is the option to feed the mill the grade and fragmentation distribution that maximizes profit. Economic CIA methods are the mining engineer's most popular justification tools for project assessment. This is due to the simplified financial environment of the mining industry. Mining engineers are rarely faced with quality and service issues when designing a mine. The only method of validating quality in a mining operation would be to view the individual processes within the mine as profit centers. Few technologies are available that can truly be considered mine-wide integration. The Mining and Earthmoving Technology Systems (METS) being developed by Caterpillar Inc., is a system that is a step toward this level of harmonization. CAES, previously mentioned, is part of the METS product group. Komatsu and Modular Mining are developing similar products. The system proposes to link design directly through to the equipment through a radio-link, where vehicles send geology, position, equipment condition, and maintenance information back to the mine office where plans are updated and maintenance information is processed in real-time. Furthermore, since all equipment is outfitted with positioning systems, a computerized dispatch algorithm optimizes the execution of the mine plan. Another example of this level of justification is integrating maintenance with planning and operations. Considering most mines spend about 50% of their operating budget on maintenance, a worthwhile project to consider would be integrating production maintenance with the rest of the processes . This would allow maximum equipment utilization; creating a 'lean' mining environment. Enabling technologies such as information systems, on-board diagnostics, wireless LANs, and optimization algorithms would allow such an integration to become reality. The enabling technologies would therefore have to be justified using level 3 CIA methods. 32  3.2.5.3 Level 3 CIA methods  The previously mentioned CIA methods (level 1 and 2) are still valid at this level, but should not play the governing role in the decision. Level 3 CIA methods are more complicated, require more time to perform, and are data intensive. But these methods can assess costs and benefits that are otherwise difficult to quantify. Many of these methods are probabilistic, such as sensitivity analysis, decision tree analysis, the optimistic-pessimistic analysis, and Monte Carlo simulation (note: some simulations can be deterministic). Value Analysis is an empirical test, where a smaller-scale integration isfirsttested to verify its applicability. This method reduces the element of risk through experience. Probabilities play an important role  Lipsett, Mike, Personal communication, (Tuesday, November 25 , 1998)  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  25  in these methods. Examples and explanations of these methods are provided in a later subsection. The CIA methods at this level of integration require more analysis than the previous two methods since a substantial amount of risk and detail is involved. Detail is required because the justification schemes at this level require the system under study (in this case, mining operations) must be more accurately modeled in order to perform the analysis. The presence of increased risk is due to the fact that more processes are affected by the increased process integration. If the increased information flow is used to devise methods of increasing the overall profitability of the entire system (optimization), even more systems will be affected than if a simple local optimization were performed on a single variable (usually level 2 technology). As mentioned in a previous section, Lefley (1997) undertook an analysis of risk and uncertainty in the appraisal of new technology capital projects. The following subsection describes Lefley's analysis. The analysis examines the differences between risk and uncertainty followed by management's attitudes towards risk. Finally, the methods used to identify the level of risk and to apply this level of risk to project justification is discussed. 3.2.5.3.1 Analysis of risk and uncertainty Risk is assumed by most decision-makers as being negative even though risk is defined as the action of undertaking an uncertain future. Therefore risk should be seen as being possibly positive or negative. Decision-makers perceive risk as the probability of not achieving a given target return, or the degree of expected returns. Most project risk can be separated into two components: uncertainty about the capital outlay and uncertainty about future cash flow. 3.2.5.3.2 Management's attitude towards risk According to empirical data collected by Lefley (the results of his findings are discussed in the following 2 sub-sections), several characteristics of management in industry create risk averse decision-makers. Firstly, the reward system in most large organizations encourages risk aversion, because most managers are rewarded based on returns, not potential returns. This in turn induces a short-term solution mentality among most executives. Empirical evidence shows that managers in Western society tend to be risk averse compared to Japanese manager who tend to make more business risks (especially when it comes to new technology). This has been attributed to the fact that Japanese business culture tends to aim to long-term growth rather than short-term business performance and the more consensusdriven decision process which ensures management decision are in tune with executive vision (and distributes responsibility for the risk in a decision) . Finally, according to empirical 33  34  Lefley, Frank, Approaches to risk and uncertainty in the appraisal of new technology capital projects, International Journal of Production Economics 53, 1997 Lipsett, Mike, Personal communication, (Tuesday, November 25 , 1998)  3 4  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  th  Sean Dessureault  26  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  data, age has a direct correlation with an individual's risk acceptance, when dealing with business. Younger business people tend to accept more risk in business than older individuals. This is has been attributed to the younger individual's requirement to 'prove' him/herself (and a difference in perception of risk). 3.2.5.3.3 Risk identification Lefley listed and described four techniques used in the identification and assessment of risk. For example, he determined through empirical research, that 81% of US manufacturing companies use the payback period in their evaluation of new technology projects . He warns that the use of this technique is ineffective since it is only a measure of 'time risk', and that there are many other aspects of project risk that may be missed using this evaluation technique. 35  Sensitivity analysis uses a range of outcomes to determine how sensitive projected cash flows are to changes in the forecasted cash flows. Those projects that show a high variation in projected cash flowsfromsmall variations in forecasted cash flows are considered to be high risk. Empirical evidence suggests that sensitivity analysis is the second most popular technique to gauge risk and is used by 43% of large US manufacturers . This has sharply increased in the last decade due to the availability of analysis tools such as spreadsheets. 36  Probability analysis, also known as decision analysis uses probabilities to determine the worth of a project through the use of decision trees (the exact method is presented in a further section). This technique also has the option to include the assessment of personal risk preference with the use of the utility function (also explained in a further section). This method is used by only 19% of US manufacturers in the appraisal of new technology projects despite its obvious applicability . 37  Monte-Carlo simulation or risk analysis techniques, are a standard technique of random selection where the occurrence of the outcome of a number of variables cannot be determined mathematically but where analytical relationships exist. Due to the availability of software and microcomputers, 18% of US manufacturers use this technique in the evaluation of risk . 38  3.2.5.3.4 Risk application There are several techniques are used to incorporate risk when evaluating capital investments. Adjustment of the hurdle is the most popular method of dealing with risk; for example, shortening the maximum payback period or increasing the discount rate are the Leftley, Frank and J. Sarkis. Short-termism and the appraisal ofAMT capital projects in the US and UK., International Journal of Production Research., vol. 35 no. 2., p.341-368 Lefley Ibid, p.360 Lefley, Ibid, p. 26  3 5  3 6  3 7  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  27  most common methods. Research shows that 49% of US manufacturing companies adjust the hurdle to take risk into account. Many critics argue against adjusting hurdle rates. Baldwin argues that the ROR should be inviolate and should be presented as two figures: a pure, unaltered state and a risk adjusted state, so that the effect of risk can be judged . Other pundits ' state that the true cost of capital should be used instead of a risk adjusted discount rate. Some critics even argue that time and risk are logically separate variables . Furthermore, the UK National Economic Development Council supports this view, stating in 1971 that varying the discount rate with riskiness is a somewhat arbitrary way of dealing with risk and uncertainty. 39  40 41  42  One method of taking risk into account that is acceptable to Lefley is the certainty equivalent value (CEV). This value is used to alter uncertain values, which reduce in the case of revenues and increase in the case of cost. The main disadvantage of this method is the subjectivity that is applied when determining the risk factor used to calculate the CEV. A current survey shows that 3.4 % of US firms use the CEV approach when taking risk into account when evaluating new technologies . CEV is also known simply as certainty equivalent (CE). It is presented in the Decision Analysis section of this paper. 43  The capital asset pricing model (CAPM) suggests that there is a certain level of profit expected for an acceptable level of risk. The method determines the level of systematic (inherent) risk and labels this value beta. The method can then suggest the appropriate level of profitability that would be expected by the stockholders. Some argue that extending the CAPM beyond its original framework for the purpose of new technology appraisal, reduces the applicability of the method , however it is still considered to be a good predictor of returns and is better than anything else available . Current research shows that no US manufacturing companies use the CAPM method; however, 2.8% of UK companies do . 44  45  46  These methods are obviously complicated and time consuming to perform, and so only projects with long-planning horizons warrant the use of these sophisticated risk measurement techniques. A further obstacle of using such techniques is that they require interpretation of the results. Managers prefer easy to understand results such as those that come from Lefley, Ibid, p.28 Baldwin, R.H., How to assess investment proposals., Harvard Business Review, May/June, 1959, p.98104 Allan, D., The cost of capital., Administrator, June 1992, p. 2-3 Pearson, G., The strategic discount-protecting new business projects against def. Long Range Planning., 19(1), 1986, p. 18-24 Robichek, A.A., Myers, S.C., Trends in the use of management science techniques in the use of riskadjusted discount rates., Journal of Finance., December 1966., p. 727-730 Lefley, Ibid, p.29 Ross, S.A., The current status of the CAPM., J. Finance., 1978., 33(2) p. 885-901 Lumby, S., Investment appraisal and Financial Decision., Chapman & Hall., London., 1994 3 8  3 9  4 0  41  4 2  4 3  4 4  4 5  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  28  decreasing the minimum payback period. Decision-makers seldom choose to spend time trying to understand the results from a simulation or decision analysis. Management attitudes towards risk are also a major influence on the outcome of the proposed project. If a manager is very risk averse, he is unlikely to support any project that includes the integration of new technology. As the use of computers and simulation in industry increases, the use of similar tools in the appraisal of capital projects will facilitate management's acceptance of the more realistic estimates of the effects of risk. 3.2.6 Level 4 3.2.6.1 Level 4: Manufacturing - Full integration  Full integration links the entire manufacturing process and all its overhead processes through an extensive information network. The general term for this level of integration is computer integrated manufacturing (CIM). (Note: CIM is classified in a third category by Meredith and Suresh (1985); however, the classification scheme used here is the scheme devised by Meredith and Hill (1986)) The main advantages of this level of integration are competitive advantage and strategic importance. The risks involved are considerable. Usually, the entire corporation must undergo changes. Furthermore, a reliance on highly complex, relatively new technology is also necessary. Examples of actual systems are: Pratt & Whitney's compressor blade plant in Georgia, GM's "factory of the future" in Michigan and several others. 3.2.6.2 Level 4: Mining - Blue-Sky R&D  This level of integration in mining is difficult to conceive. The inherent unknowns in mining due to ground and geological conditions make this type of endeavor impossible considering today's technology. An intensive look at a fully automated mine by INCO's Mines Research department through the mining automation program (MAP) is the only project that the author is aware of that resembles this level of integration; however, the key factors, which are strategic in nature, that motivate manufacturing industry into developing CIM (such as competitive advantage, entry barriers and business objectives) are much less relevant in the mining context. There are no unique technologies that allow a copper ore producer to make its ore more attractive to a potential concentrator or smelter that could eliminate his competitor. Cost could seen to be the only motivator that would induce a competitive advantage in mining. X X X TMS -> Jon Peck & Jim Gray  Lefley, Ibid, p.31  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  3.2.7 The  29  Classification Conclusion  m i n i n g c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s c h e m e d i v i d e d the present l e v e l s o f m i n i n g t e c h n o l o g y into three  separate levels.  E a c h l e v e l o f t e c h n o l o g y c o r r e s p o n d s to a c e r t a i n j u s t i f i c a t i o n s c h e m e .  The  f i g u r e b e l o w is a m i n i n g a l t e r e d f i g u r e o r i g i n a l l y p r e s e n t e d b y M e r e d i t h a n d H i l l ( p a s t e d at the b e g i n n i n g o f the section) for the m a n u f a c t u r i n g industry.  L e v e l 4 was not considered  s i n c e n o t e c h n o l o g y e x i s t s that f u l l y i n t e g r a t e s a m i n e / m i l l i n g o p e r a t i o n .  The  figure b e l o w  is u s e d t o s u g g e s t w h i c h p o s s i b l e C I A m e t h o d is m o s t a p p r o p r i a t e at a  certain level o f technology.  F o r e x a m p l e , the v e r t i c a l dotted l i n e represents the  w h e r e a l e v e l 2 t e c h n o l o g y is u n d e r i n v e s t i g a t i o n .  It s h o u l d b e s e e n that t h e m o s t  situation intensely  s h a d e d a r e a s ( r e g i o n c l o s e s t t o the s h a d e d - w h i t e b o r d e r ) a r e o p p o s i t e t h e ' p o r t f o l i o m e t h o d s ' . Therefore  at l e v e l 2,  the m o s t a p p r o p r i a t e C I A m e t h o d s  are t h e p o r t f o l i o m e t h o d s .  The  f i n a n c i a l m e t h o d s r e m a i n i n the s h a d e d area, therefore they are still useful i n the e v a l u a t i o n . T h e r e f o r e a l l j u s t i f i c a t i o n s c h e m e s s t i l l i n the r e g i o n a b o v e t h e h o r i z o n t a l d o t t e d l i n e a r e appropriate. Level 1 Level 2 Production Units I Integrated Process - Single unit equipment • - Linked departments - Labor (incl. Eng. & Supp.) .-Optr enhancement Techniques  Level 3 Total Mining Integ. - Oper.-Eng. Link - Real-time Optimztn  Examples  Economic  - Payback - DCF - ROI  Portfolio  - Programming Models - Scoring Models - Growth Options - non-numeric  Analytic  - Certainty equivalent Value - Capital Asset Pricing Model - Value Analysis - Sensitivity Analysis - OptimisticPessimistic Analysis - Probability analysis - Decision-Tree - Risk Analysis / Simulation  :  Figure 3-5: Choosing the appropriate CIA method The  t a b l e b e l o w c a n b e u s e d t o f u r t h e r c l a r i f y s o m e o f the d e f i n i t i o n s o f e a c h l e v e l a n d t o  c o m p a r e the m i n i n g a n d m a n u f a c t u r i n g s p e c i f i c a t i o n s .  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 3 - Classification of Technologies and Justification Techniques  30  Table 3-1: Manufacturing/Mining Comparisons  Manufacturing Step  Mining Equivalent  Planning, determining the most efficient manner of manufacture. Structuring the various machines and steps in assembling a component  Determining mine method, optimal pit depth, provable reserves, deciding the most profitable shape and sequence of the mine.  Level 1: N C machine tool• basic tool, does not provide any specific benefits other than its designed activity. Little flexibility in unplanned design change  Level 1: Truck (&operator) • basic tool, does not provide any benefits other than its allocated task. Drill (& operator) • basic tool, relatively little flexibility in unplanned design change. • Shovel - important tool, used to size truck fleet, does not provide any benefits other than its allocated task. Level 2: E T - GPS, drill monitoring, organizational theory GPS assisted planning & drilling • Integrates a series of activities, such as planning, map updating, drilling and surveying into a more integrated process • Provides less human interaction thereby can be more repetitive and hence produce designs with higher quality • Flexible to unplanned design changes • Can take more factors into account during planning thereby increasing quality of design  Level 2: enabling technology (ET) - PLCs Cells • Integrates a series o f activities into a single process. • Provides less human interaction thereby can be more repetitive and hence produce manufactures with higher quality FMS • Uses robots that have the capabilities to perform many different operations. • Flexible to unplanned design changes Level 3: enabling technology: IS Linked Islands • Integrates many major activities into a single process • Can take advantage of market changes • Greatly reduces human interaction thereby is less prone to human error • Greatly reduces transcribing information • Reduces repetitive human tasks Produces components with better quality Level 4: CIM » Same benefits as above although amplified  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Level 3: enabling technology: IS, C A E S , GPS, O R M i n e - M i l l integration: • Integrates many major activities into a single process • Can take advantage of market changes • Greatly reduces human interaction thereby is less prone to human error • Greatly reduces transcribing information • Reduces repetitive human tasks » Produces ore of better quality  Sean Dessureault  31  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  4  Analytical Examples  This chapter reviews the justification methods introduced in the previous chapter. Equations, methodologies and numerical examples are provided for most schemes. The examples are organized into the three levels described in the previous chapter. 4.1  Level 1 CIA methods - Common Economic  There are numerous formulae and approaches that firms use to evaluate the potential economic performance of a proposed project. The techniques most common in the mining industry include the payback method, incremental rate of return (IRR, also known as internal rate of return) or return on investment (ROI, referred to also as discounted cash flow rate of return (DCF-ROR) or simply DCF ). Manufacturing statistics indicate that the overwhelming majority (91%) of firms in manufacturing use the payback method and ROI methods. These figures may also reflect some habits of mining management. 47  This section will begin by presenting some of the techniques currently used in industry for economically justifying new projects. Criticisms of the various methods are also provided. Those techniques that will be used for the applied section of this thesis will be explored in detail in this section. The basic economic methods include payback, discounted cash flows (DCF) and internal rate of return (IRR). 4.1.1 Payback One of the most common evaluation criteria used by mining companies is the payback method . The payback period is relatively simple: it is the amount of time for the initial investment of the project to be paid-back from the cost reductions or amount of income it creates. 48  4.1.1.1 Analytical Example of the Payback Method  Given the following example: A mining company is considering improving its grade distribution to the mill. There are several options available: Project 1: A GPS based shovel-monitoring system that has many other options; however, the estimates only reflect the improved grade distribution and avoidance of load misdirection. Project 2: Automated trip selector that the shovel operator can activate via radio link to indicate to the truck driver where the load should go.  Gentry, D.W., O'Neil, T.J., Mine Investment Analysis, American Institute of Mining, Metallurgical Petroleum Engineers, Inc., 1984, p. 267 Gentry, Ibid., p.256  4 7  4 8  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  3 2  Project 3: re-training the truck drivers and buying an electronic trip counter to keep track of operator performance The table below summarizes all the economic variables involved in the calculation of the payback period. Table 4-1: Economic variables for Payback Example  Project 1 Project 2 Project 3 High Tech Tech Retraining Initial capital input $ 220,000 $ 100,000 $ 18,000 Operating costs $ 2,000 $ 3,000 $ 15,000 Revenue $ 50,000 $ 30,000 $ 20,000 Risk Adjusted Int. r 15% 10% 5% Project life 7 6 4  The table below calculates the payback periods of each of the projects. Analysis of the results is discussed following the table. Table 4-2: Payback Example Results  Project year investment —> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Payback (yrs.) Total p r o f i t  $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $  Annual HT 220,000 48,000 48,000 48,000 48,000 48,000 48,000 48,000  4 116,000  Net Cash Flows  $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $  T 100,000 27,000 27,000 27,000 27,000 27,000 27,000  -  $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $  3 62,000  $  -  R 18,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000  3 2,000  According to this method, if a manager were selecting a project based on payback period, projects 2 or 3 would be selected instead of the most profitable project 1. This method can increase in complexity when considering added variables. Added complexity may add accuracy, or more realistic estimates. However, if the proposed project has not yet been implemented (there is no historical data on which to base estimates), accuracy decreases. 4.1.1.2 Analysis of the Validity of the Payback Method  When analyzing this method, several disadvantages can be seen. Primarily, the payback period is much too simple to model a complex system. In a complex system, some variables may not be easily accounted for, such as flexibility or improved engineering plans. For example, if a new engineering planning software package is being evaluated, the increased Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  33  compatibility of the new system with other software may not be easily accounted for. This disadvantage is shared with most economic evaluation methods A second disadvantage of the payback period is that it fails to consider the timing of cash flows, therefore it cannot be used to assess profitability. For example, consider the example used above. Proposal 2 has the lowest payback period yet it has the lowest overall profit. A third disadvantage of the payback period is that the timing of payments is disregarded. A further disadvantage is some projects are more risky than others. In the example used above, the cost of capital and risk is ignored. These drawbacks are easily accounted for by utilizing a risk adjusted discounted payback period, as seen in the table below. Table 4-3: Payback Example Results using Discount factor Annual Net Cash Flows HT T R  Project year  investment -> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Payback (yrs.)  $ 220,000 $ 100,000 $ $ 48,000 $ 27,000 $ $ 41,739 $ 24,545 $ $ 36,295 $ 22,314 $ $ 31,561 $ 20,285 $ $ 27,444 $ 18,441 $ $ 23,864 $ 16,765 $ $ 20,752 $ $ $ $ $  Total profit  $  6 9,655 $  4 29,351 $  18,000 5,000 4,762 4,535 4,319  3 616  From the results of the example, it can be seen that the first project is no longer the most profitable, furthermore, project 2 has a longer payback period than project 3. 4.1.1.3 Reasoning for Selecting t h e Payback method Despite the numerous shortcomings of the payback method, it is still highly utilized in the mining industry . The following is a list that provides some of the reasons, given by 49  management, why this method is so popular. The main reason the payback method was selected to be used in this case study is due to its popularity. However, this method is considered to be inadequate due to its numerous deficiencies. 1. Simplicity The payback period is very simple. Managers can easily calculate the figure and understand the reasoning. Furthermore, it is much simpler to have an index, or common figure, that can  Gentry, Ibid., p.259  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  34  be used as a comparison between competing projects. A further simplifying factor is that the break-even point is very obvious. 2. Lack of interest in new techniques Managers are well familiar with this technique, which has been used in the industry for decades. A sense of traditionalism has evolved around certain techniques, to the exclusion of new techniques. This is an important problem but a social-managerial issue and will therefore not be covered in this study. Established techniques may still be applicable but not in all cases. 3. Risk reduction A shorter payback period is considered to prevent management from being exposed to risk. For example, if a risky project were being considered, a shorter payback period would leave the company exposed to risk for a shorter period of time. The validity of this argument was discussed in a previous section. The manager must decide what the appropriate payback period should be. This value is often very subjective. Also, selection of appropriate discount rates is an issue that will be raised for every economic evaluation method.  4.1.2 Discounted Cash Flow Techniques (DCF) Discounted cash flow (DCF) techniques use a discount rate, usually in terms of a percentage, to represent risk. The discount rate is usually either a hurdle rate or the true cost of capital. Several versions of discounted cash flows are used in the following economic evaluation methods: NPV, ROI and IRR. Other DCF methods will not be explained. 4.1.2.1 Net Present Value  This method is highly valued as one of industry's favorites. The net present value represents the amount of money the project is worth at the present time (t=0). The number is calculated by summing the inflows and outflows of cash, discounted at the selected discount rate. The choice of the discount rate is an important issue. The discount rate can be the true cost of capital or a value set by the corporation that can be adjusted to take risk into account. The general equation that best represents the NVP is presented below. Typically, if the net present value is a negative value, the project should be rejected. The NPV is given by below:  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  35  Net present value = ^present value of cash benefits - ^jT present value of cash costs Equation 4-1: Net Present Value  4.1.2.1.1 Numerical Example of the NPV method Consider the following example: Table 4-4: Data to be used in NPV example  initial investment Operating cost increasing at Revenue  $ 4,000 year 1 $ 3,000 year 2 450 per year $ $  0.75% per year 4,000 per year  Table 4-5: NPV example  Net investment Operating Cost Revenue Income Income (DCF@12%)  $ $ $ $ $  1 (4,000) (450) 4,000 (450) (450)  NPV@12%  $  7,308  2  $ (3,000) (453) $ $ $ 4,000 $ 547 $ $ 481 $ $  3 (457) 4,000 3,543 2,744  4  $ $ $ $  (460) 4,000 3,540 2,412  5  $ $ $ $  (464) 4,000 3,536 2,121  4.1.2.1.2 Validity of the NPV method Two characteristics make this technique popular and more accurate than the payback period. This subsection will list these qualities and determine whether these qualities apply when evaluating advanced technologies. 1. Takes into account the time value of money Using a discount rate takes into account the time value of money. Determining the appropriate discount rate is one of the difficulties of this method. The number is very subjective and sometimes set by corporate objectives. Some discount rates are set excessively high as a hedge against risk. This is very common when managers are considering new technology that has not yet been widely accepted. 2. Simple to compare projects Similar to the payback method, NPV provides a single number upon which comparisons can be made between two projects with similar goals; however, one of the main problems with this method is that it does not measure profitability. For example, consider two projects with  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  36  different capital input but identical NPVs. The project that is more capital intensive yet still profitable may be selected over a project that requires less capital but is more profitable. These deficiencies can be overcome by using a version of this method called the profitability index (PI) or the benefit/cost ratio (B/C). V PV of net cash inflows B/C ratio (PI) = ^ 2J PV of net cash outflows Equation 4-2: Benefit/Cost ratio  4.1.2.1.3 Reasoning for selecting the NPV method Despite its shortcomings and its misuse, NPV can be modified to better estimate the economic impact of advanced technology on the operation. More variables can be taken into account to consider the qualitative benefits. A lower discount rate can be used to represent the unquantifiable qualitative benefits. Therefore the reasons for choosing this method for this case study are its accuracy, popularity and possible applicability to new technology. 4.1.2.2 Internal Rate of Return (IRR)  Variations of the IRR method include rate of return (ROR) and return on investment (ROI). This economic justification method is used by the mineral industry more than any other technique . The internal rate of return can be defined as the interest rate (discount rate) that allows the sum of the present value of all the inflows and outflows of cash to equal zero. This definition satisfies the equation below. 50  £ PV cash inflows - £ PV cash outflows = NPV = 0 Equation 4-3: Internal Rate of Return  4.1.2.2.1 Numerical Example Illustrating the IRR method Using spreadsheet solvers, the IRR can be easily found. Prior to the introduction of spreadsheets, this calculation was done by trial and error. The example below was solved using the solver in Excel. Microsoft's Excel solver is used in the example in the section describing level 2 technologies.  50  Gentry, Ibid., p.267  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  37  Table 4-6: IRR example data Project 1 Initial capital  yr 1 yr2 total Operating costs Revenue Project life  $ $ $ $ $  110,000 110,000 220,000 1,000 40,000 7  Project 2 $ $ $ $ $  80,000 30,000 110,000 3,000 30,000 6  Project 3 $ $ $ $ $  6,000 8,000 14,000 15,000 20,000 3  Table 4-7: IRR example results  Year investment - > 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  IPR  Annual Net Cash Flows Project 1 Project 2 Project 3 $ (110,000) $ (80,000) $ (6,000) 5,000 $ 39,000 $ 27,000 $ (64,710) (2,463) (2,516) $ $ $ 32,396 $ 18,196 $ 3,516 $ 29,526 14,938 $ $ $ $ 26,910 $ 12,263 $ $ 24,526 $ 10,067 $ $ 22,353 $ $  $  -  $  10%  -  22%  $  -  19%  As can be seen in the results above, project 2 has the highest IRR. The acceptance or rejection of a single project using the IRR method depends on the hurdle rate set, usually by the corporation or manager. 4.1.2.2.2 Validity of the IRR method There are several reasons for IRR's widespread popularity as a financial evaluation tool. The primary advantage is that it provides a single value that can be used to judge the project. A further advantage is that the result is presented as a percentage. According to Gentry (1984) engineers prefer percentages to absolute values such as NPV. A third advantage is that this method takes into account the timing of the payments. Another advantage is that it does not require a subjective input in the form of a pre-established discount rate. 4.1.3  Risk Considerations  Risk is an important component to the justification of projects. There is a great deal of literature on the assessment of risk when investing in new technology. The uncertainty of new technologies is an important consideration and therefore risk plays a dominant role in the evaluation of technology-based projects. Risk and how to identify it and take it into account in economic evaluation is discussed in the sections describing level 3 technologies and justification schemes. Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  38  4.2 Level 2 Justification Schemes - Portfolio & Scoring models  Level 2 justification schemes include programming models, scoring models, non-numeric arguments and growth options. Programming models include linear, integer and goal programming. Programming models and growth options are considered to be portfolio models since the securities industry uses them to optimize investment portfolios. Scoring models include weighted scoring and the analytical hierarchy process (AHP). Non-numeric models are the sacred cow and operating necessity arguments. Descriptions and examples of most of these methods will be provided. 4.2.1 Programming models Linear programming (LP) was developed by George Dantzig, then a young mathematician. He named the algorithm used to solve an LP problem the simplex method. It was designed to solve complex logistics during WWII in the effort to supply Britain with vital war material. The algorithm can quickly solve complex linear problems. The problems can be solved even faster using computers . LP is frequently used in the manufacturing industry . However, LP is uncommon in the mining industry, despite its obvious application due to the frequent logistics involved in mining. 51  52  53  Integer programming is similar to linear programming except there is a finite set of possible results or inputs. For example, it can be used to select the optimum set of projects from a list of various inter-related projects. In this situation, the model's objective can be to maximize the NPV under various restrictions . 54  Goal programming allows the evaluator of the proposed project to consider separate objectives independently and on different weighted bases. Many restrictions are possible on the various resources. The following subsections include examples of integer programming and goal programming. It should be noted that all examples given in this text are illustrative, not exhaustive. 4.2.1.1 Integer Programming  Optimization models where some or all of the variables must be integers are called integer programming (IP) models . An example of how to build and execute a model on a modern spreadsheet tool is provided. Microsoft's Excel program is used to formulate and solve the IP model. 55  Dantzig, G. The Diet Problem. Interfaces 20 no.4, 1990 p. 43-47 Winston, Wayne L., Albright, Christian S., Practical Management Science, Duxbury Press, 1997 Meredith and Hill, Ibid., p.54 Soni et. al., Economic and Financial Justification Methods for Advanced Automated Manufacturing: An Overview, Economics of Advanced Manufacturing Systems, Chapman & Hall, 1992, p. 9 5 1  5 2 5 3  5 4  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  39  Example: Minecomp, a fictitious underground base metal mine, is considering investing in one of several different technologies. Minecomp is considering upgrading its communications system to provide possible automation. The monetary values of both the investment and estimated return are provided in the table below. Some restrictions are imposed on the model due to technology incompatibilities. These restrictions are also presented below. Table 4-8: Data for Minecomp Example Investment  1 2 3 4 5 6  Description  Leaky feeder (low capacity) Leaky feeder (high capacity) Distributed antenna system Radio tech 1 Radio tech 2 Both Radio techs  Abreviation  LFL LFH DAS R1 R2 RR  Cash Required NPV (in thousands)  $150 $200 $250 $400 $400 $600 $150 $500 $100 $1,750 $250 $3,500  Table 4-9: Restrictions for Minecomp Example Restrictions: Radio tech 1 cannot function with LFL DAS cannot function with LFL Total Budget of $730,000  The main components of this assessment are: •  The investments chosen  •  The cash required for the investments  •  Total NPV of the chosen investments  This model was developed on Microsoft Excel® for Office 97®. (It can be developed on versions of Excel since Excel 5.) The data was entered into the spreadsheet as seen in the figure below. The changing cells were in the investment decision row. The goal of the algorithm was to maximize the NPV subject to the constraints. The solver was invoked and constraints applied. The solver changed the cell in array B2:G2 to reflect the maximized NPV given the constraints.  5 5  Winston, Ibid, p.214  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  1 2 3  A  c  B  LFL  LFH  Investment decision  " V Investment C L  40  0  D E F R2 DAS R I 1 0 1  $150 $250 $400 $150  t  1  0  $100  $250  5  6 7 8  NPV  ______] *  total cost  ^  _  J  H  G RR  $730 Budget  I  J  Restrictions A K B = 0 RR«R1 0 RRKR2 0 DAS x LFL 0 0  RIxLFL  10 total NPV  Figure 4-1: Optimal Solution for Minecomp Example  As can be seen from the figure above, the solution to the problem would be to invest in a DAS, while using radio technologies 1 and 2. This example may appear trivial, but real situations may require many more variables and constraints. 4.2.1.2 Goal Programming  Goal programming is ideal for situations where a company wants to achieve several objectives, given limited resources. Sometimes it is impossible to realize all the objectives simultaneously , but in the solvution process, an optimum is usually achieved . If the company cares to prioritize its objectives, goal programming can still be used. This method of prioritizing objectives is called a preemptive goal programming approach . 56  57  58  Example: A fictional open pit mining company, OPMC, would like to improve its drilling operations. Management has identified three key variables that measure drill performance. The mill would like a specific size distribution, making fragmentation a key variable. Due to the geological conditions, accurate drill position is another important variable. Finally, the drilling operation is taking too much time to set-up the drill and begin drilling, therefore setup time is another variable. Management has identified two possible solutions. The first is to undertake an intensive operator-training program. There is an incremental improvement in the three key variables governing drill performance, as seen in the table below. The second solution is the purchase of a drill navigation package offered by Aqmod, a fictitious mining technology provider. Each navigation package purchased provides an incremental improvement in the three drill improvement variables. A total budget of $170 000 has been budgeted to this project. These data are summarized in the tables below.  Winston, Ibid. p. 338 Camm, Jeffery D., Evans, James R., Management Science; Modeling, Analysis and Interpretation., South-Western College Publishing., 1996., p. 328-329 will not be explained here but readers are encouraged to review the Winston (1997)  5 6 5 7  58  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  41  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  Table 4-10: Goals for O P M C Example Description Abbreviation goal 1: improve fragmentation by Frag 31% goal 2: improve blast hole positior Pos 20% goal 3: decrease set-up time S-t 30% Table 4-11: Improvement Methods for OPMC Example  Description Abbreviation method 1 Higher level of train Training method 2 Aqmod drill platforn Aqmod  % improvement/unit Frag Pos S-t  1% 17%  2% 8%  Cost/unit  3% $ 3,300 11% $ 80,000  A spreadsheet model, similar to the integer programming model above, will be formulated. The main components of this model are listed below: •  Number of improvement method units purchased  •  Cost of the methods  • Overall improvement The spreadsheet model was formulated as shown in the figure below. The solver determined the values in cells B8 and C8; they represent the optimized solution. The optimal solution is to train three operators, while purchasing two Aqmod drill packages. Changing the estimated improvement values incurred from the two methods can alter the solution. Increasing or decreasing the percentage values of the goals can alter their importance. For example, if the management considers that decreasing the set-up time is of prime importance, the goal value may be changed from 30 to perhaps 40. Therefore this solution is only as valid as the estimated improvements or management goals. A B Training 1 1% Fragmentation 2 2% Position 3 3% Set-up time 4 5 3,300 5 Cost/Unit $ 6 7 8 number purchased 9 total cost I 10 Cost constraint 11 12 Improvement 13 Frag 37% "14 22% Pos 15 31% S-t 16  C Aqmod 17% 6% 11%  D  80,000 2  <= >= >= >=  I  Budget 170,000  Goal 31% 20% 30%  Figure 4-2: Optimal Solution for the OPMC Example  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  42  4.2.2 Scoring Models The two scoring models explained in this section are the weighted average and analytical hierarchy process. The weighted average method is relatively simple and is used in many industries. The analytical hierarchy process (AHP) is a multi-objective decision making tool. Both these methods are used by the manufacturing industry to justify a technology acquisition. Mining examples are provided with an explanation. 4.2.2.1 Weighted Average Method  The weighted average method is simple and easy to use, but it is very subjective. The method can be used to decide between different projects, or to ensure that the project conforms to certain pre-established criteria. This method consists of quantifying the importance of different objectives, then estimating the importance of each factor. To obtain a solution, the hierarchy of the objectives is multiplied by the rating of the factors to yield a comparative score. Consider the following example: An underground mining company, UMC, which uses a vertical retreat mining method, is contemplating three different technologies for mucking out the open stopes. There are eight variables (objectives) that management considers to be of top importance for the mucking cycle: capital cost, operating cost, productivity, operator acceptance, maintenance cost, infrastructure requirements, unfamiliarity of the technology, and safety. Each technology being evaluated has a different rating on these factors on a scale of 1 to 10, here a higher number signifies a more attractive outcome. For example, if technology A has a lower capital cost, it receives either an 8 or a 10. A weight is also given to each objective, depending on the importance of the objective to the mine management. The three technologies under consideration are described below: Option 1: line of sight tele-operated system. This system is well accepted by miners due to its long widespread use in mines. However, many operators are accidentally killed or injured due to operator error (controlling the machine from an unprotected area). Option 2: Controlling the LHD from a control room on the same level. This technology is relatively straightforward, but communications infrastructure is required. Productivity is slightly higher since higher speeds can be used. Option 3: Controlling LHD from surface. This technology is state-of-the-art. The miner is not exposed to danger, and less ventilation is required in the area. Increased productivity can be achieved since the LHD can operate at higher speeds and since work can begin as soon as the miner arrives at the surface workstation. However, no mines currently use such systems in a production capacity. A further drawback would be the operator resistance to the Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  43  technology since more intense work hours are possible and the technology is unfamiliar. A final drawback is the considerable extension of communications infrastructure that would be required beyond option 2. A manager can then rate the projects according to the table below. The scoring is subjective. For example, the opinion of the importance of safety may be increased or decreased depending on the manager, or the corporate policies. Table 4-12: Weighted Scores for U M C Example  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  Projects Factor LSTR TRL TRS Weight Capital Cost 8 6 3 7 Operating Cost 9 6 6 8 Productivity 6 8 10 10 Legend: Operator acceptance 7 8 5 6 Line of Sight tele-remoh LSTR Maintenance Costs 7 6 5 7 Tele-remote from level TRL infrastructure requireme 10 7 5 3 Tele-remote from surfac TRS Unfamiliarity 10 7 6 4 Least desireable impact 1 Safety 4 7 10 2 Most desireable impact 10  The final results are presented in the table below. This result was achieved by multiplying the weight of each project objective by the rating each project receives. The weights are summed, then normalized for ease of comparison. According to the manager at this mine, the line-of-sight remote control LHD is the best decision in this case. The power of this CIA method lies in the ability to quantify qualitative factors such as safety or operator acceptance. Table 4-13: Results of Weighted Average Method for U M C Example Factor LSTR TRL TRS Capital Cost 56 42 21 Operating Cost 72 48 48 Productivity 60 80 100 Operator acceptance 48 42 30 Maintenance Costs 49 42 35 infrastructure requireme 21 30 15 Unfamiliarity 40 28 24 Safety 8 14 20 Sum: 363 317 293 Normalized 1.00J0.87 0.81  4.2.2.2 The Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP)  The analytical hierarchy process (AHP) is another multi-objective decision making tool. Tomas Saaty developed the technique to overcome inconsistency in human judgment. This powerful decision tool is used by many disciplines including accounting, finance, marketing, 59  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  44  energy resource planning, microcomputer selection, sociology, history, architecture and political science . The power of this decision process is that it quantifies qualitative values so that they can be evaluated with the naturally quantitative values. For example, qualitative benefits can be considered with financial values. This method is similar to the weighted average evaluation technique where objectives or factors are assessed. The power of this method is the ability to compare the importance of two different factors through a method called the Pairwise Comparison Matrix. An example is given along with a pragmatic explanation of the mathematics involved. 60  To obtain the weights the Pairwise Comparison Matrix is formed. The entry rows are labeled / and entry columns j. Priority or importance is measured on an integer 1-9 scale, according to the definitions provided in the table below. The phrases in the table are comparative phrases, to help the evaluator compare two variables. The values may seem discrete, however, more experienced evaluators may use a continuous scale. Table 4-14: Interpretation of Values in Pairwise Comparison Matrix Value of a  61  Interpretation  B  1 3 5 7 9  Objectives / and are equally important Objective /' is slightly more important than j Objective / is strongly more important than j Objective / is very strongly more important than j Objective / is absolutely more important than ;  The following is an example of how pairwise comparisons are made. If an evaluator were judging a situation where there are three objectives, the matrix would contain a 3x3pattern. \  *2I  \2  a  22  a  23  G  -•31  32  a  33j  a  1  a y 21  V/31 l f  /  a  n  «32  i )  Equation 4-4: Pairwise Comparison Matrix for 3 objectives  Equations above represent a situation where there are three objectives. To illustrate, if objective 1 is strongly more important than objective 2, then a^ =5 and a2i = 1/5. Correspondingly, if objective 3 is very strongly more important than objective 1, then a i=7 and ai -l/7. Finally, if objective 2 is slightly more important than objective 3, then a 3=3 and a32=l/3. The matrix below is obtained using these values. 3  2  6 0 6 1  2  Saaty, Thomas. The Analytical Hierarchy Process. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1988 Winston, Ibid, p.371 Winston, Ibid, p.364  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  45  Figure 4-3: Pairwise Comparison Matrix solution for 3x3 example  Example: An open pit iron ore mine, IOM, is trying to determine what technology, if any, should be implemented. IOM has a large mill throughput therefore fragmentation is very important for the mill recovery. A further difficulty is that the complicated geology makes the large blast patterns difficult to design. Grade control is also important in iron ore mines. At IOM, it is difficult for shovel operators to distinguish between low and high grade. Management has several objectives that resulted in the decision to invest in technology: •  Objective 1: Fragmentation  •  Objective 2: Lead-time for blast pattern design changes from geological updates  •  Objective 3: Cost of equipment  •  Objective 4: Grade control  Several technologies might help the manager achieve the objectives mentioned above. One suggestion is to continue using the same tools so that costs do not increase, another is to implement drill monitoring technology, a third is to implement shovel monitoring technology while a fourth, is to implement both the drill and shovel monitoring technology. The figure below summarizes the objectives and solutions: Table 4-15: Objectives and solution options for IOM example Description Objective 1 Ideal fragmentation for Mill  Abbreviation Fragment  Objective 2 Flexibility of design changes Objective 5 Cost of equipment Objective 6 Better grade control  Flexibility Cost Grade  Option Option Option Option  No tech Drill Shovel All techs  1: 2: 3: 4:  Without drill technology Drill tech Shovel tech Both shovel & drill tech  Solution to IOM problem: Step 1: Determine the Pairwise Comparison matrix. The manager, after careful contemplation, forms the following pairwise comparison matrix, on a spreadsheet:  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  46  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  Fragment Flexibility Cost Grade 2 3 5 1 Fragment 1/2 1/4 1/5 Flexibility 1 1/3 Cost 1 1 1/2 Grade 2  •Sil  Figure 4-4: Pairwise Comparison Matrix for Objectives for IOM example  From the matrix above, it can be seen that the manager considers fragmentation strongly more important than flexibility. Step 2: determine the weights. Take the sum of each of the columns, and divide each value in the column the sum of the column. (This normalizes the column.) The values obtained for the normalized matrix are: Fragment Flexibility Cost Grade  Fragment Flexibility Cost Grade 0.4918 0.4167 0.5714 0.4444 0.0984 0.0833 0.0476 0.1111 0.1639 0.3333 0.1905 0.2222 0.2459 0.1667 0.1905 0.2222  Figure 4-5: Normalized Pairwise Comparative Matrix  An example of the calculation used for the above matrix is: 1  £11  a (normalized) = a + a +fl + a u  n  n  13  1 4  1+  Vc+ A +  0.4918  l  Step 3: Determine the weights of the objectives. The weight of each objective is calculated by taking the average value of each row. From the matrix above, the resulting 1x4 vector is found to be: '0.4810 0.0851 0.2275 0.2063^  w= v  From this vector, it can be seen that the manager considers fragmentation to be the most important objective, while cost and grade are relatively the same. Flexibility is not a great concern according to this evaluation. Comparisons can be inconsistent due to human discrepancies. A method was devised to check for inconsistencies. The solution consists of multiplying the pairwise comparison matrix by the score of the objectives. Therefore, from the example above, the following multiplication is made: Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Se^nDessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  f1  w.  consistency  5  1/  1  1/ /3 1/  4 1/ /2  47  3 1/ /4 1  2"  1  1  2 1  '0.481 f 0.0851 0.2275 ^0.2063,  Using the numbers from the vector w the weighted objective values. 2.0017 0.4811  con  '2.0017" 0.3414 0.9346 ^0.8446,  sistency,  the following single value is calculated using  0.3414 0.9346 0.8446 0.0851 0.2275 0.2063 = 0.0311 +  +  Using the value above, the consistency index (CI) is calculated using the equation below. The n variable is the number of objectives.  CI =  0.0311-/1 _ 0.0311-4  ~  n-l  3  The CI is then compared to an index value, obtained from the table below. Saaty derived the table. Table 4-16: Random Indices for Consistency Check n RI  2 0  3 0.58  4 0.9  5 1.12  6 1.24  7 1.32  62  8 1.41  •  if CI = 0, perfectly consistent  •  if CI/RI < . 10 then satisfactory consistency  •  if CI/RI > . 10 then serious inconsistencies exist  9 1.45  10 1.51  The solution is still not complete. All the steps above must be repeated for every option. Options 1 through 4 (No Tech, Drill, Shovel and All Techs) must be compared with each other, rated on the performance of each objective. Figure 4-6, represents the pairwise comparison matrix for comparing the options according to the fragmentation objective (on an Excel spreadsheet). The evaluator considers the Drill option to be moderately more important than the No Tech option for improving fragmentation (cell C13). Furthermore, according to the final scores, the Drill option is the best solution for fragmentation. Finally, it can be seen that the matrix has satisfactory consistency.  Winston, et. al., Ibid., pp.368  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  11  1 ,A ... B C D i Q ••E F Pairwise comparisons among Options on fragmentation  12  N o tech N o tech  14  Drill  1 4  15  Shovel All techs  1 3  16  48  1 Drill  (Shovel All techs  1M! 1 '  1 4  1M  1 3  !  1  H  !  I  L M j K Scores Product Ratios  Normalized Matrix  1(3 1 1(3 1  0.4918  0.1905  0.0741  0.1943  0.774293 _ 3.985108!  1.9672  0 0833  " 07619  0 2222  0.7587  2.901141 "  3.823991:  0.4918  " 0.0208  0.774293 2.512547  3.985108!  0.0833  0.0741 0 2222  0.1943  1.4754  0.1905 0.5714  0.5881  4.272324!  17  0.005544  18  !  i  _!?.  !  ;  ClrRI  '  0006161  SATISFACTORY!  Figure 4-6: Pairwise Comparison Matrix of Options for Fragementation for IOM Example  Once all score matrices have been completed, and they all have satisfactory consistency, the score matrix is multiplied by the weight matrix to obtain the final overall score matrix. The result is shown in the figure below. From the solution in Figure 4-7, both the Shovel and All Techs options satisfy the management at the iron ore mine.  No tech Drill Shovel All techs  Matrix of scores Fragment Flexibility Cost Grade 0.1943 0.1612 0.6349 0.1564 0.7587 0.5880 0.3214 0.3011 0.1943 0.3421 0.2410 0.6297 0.5881 0.9302 0.1051 0.8280  Weights 0.4811 0.0851 0.2275 0.2063  Overall Scores 0.283884 0.550276 0.307343 0.55683  s  Figure 4-7: Final Solution for IOM Example  4.2.3 Option Pricing This pricing technique was originally intended to formulate a fair, non-subjective price for stock options. Manufacturing has used this price model to determine the value of flexibility in manufacturing systems. The economic model has also been used in the mining industry for valuing the flexibility of design . 63  This method's power lies in its ability to quantify the flexibility of the technologies. In this section, the origin and mechanics of option pricing, as a justification method, will be given, with an example of its application as a justification tool. The technique can be applied to technologies that are level 2 or 3 since flexibility can be tactical or strategic in nature. An example of tactical flexibility in mining is the ability to mine a 'back-up stope' in case the planned stope becomes unavailable (for example, due to a catastrophic cave-in of the planned stope). This flexibility can be purchased by undertaking advanced development ; however, the extra capital costs of undertaking advanced development must be larger than the cost of the loss of production that would be incurred in the event of losing a stope. 64  Samis, Mike, Project evaluation using contingent claims analysis - an overview, Master's Thesis, University of the Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, 1994 Dunbar, W Scott; Sean Dessureault and Malcolm Scoble. Analysis of Flexible Mining Systems. CIM '98 CD-ROM, 1998 6 3  6 4  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  49  An example of strategic flexibility is a mining company's ability to increase production in the event of a price (of the mineral being mined) increase or shut down in the event of a price drop. Operating without a union contract and having extra capacity can purchase this type of flexibility. Three methods are discussed: the Black-Scholes' method of valuing a European Call option, binomial method of computing the option price; Azzone's method for direct application in the manufacturing industry. 4.2.3.1 Black-Scholes A European call option on a stock gives the owner the option to buy (if the option is a call option) or sell (if the option is a put option) a given number of the stock at a specified price on a particular date. (There are many types of options such as American options or Asian options; however, their particularities will not be explained here.) The date at which the option is must be exercised is called the expiration date. The price at which the option holder is allowed to buy or sell the stock is called the exercise price. The reason one would buy a call option at an exercise price X, is that he/she believes that at the price of the stock will be higher than X. Therefore when he/she exercises the call option, he/she will obtain a stock for less than its current value. The inverse is true if it is a put option. One would exercise a put option if the exercise price is more than the current price of the stock, therefore the individual/company who sold you the put option must buy the stocks at a price higher than those that you would get on the open market. The Black-Scholes option price is calculated using the following equation: Black - Sholes option price = SP * N{d  x  where  d, =— ^ K  )-EP*e-DUR*1R  *N(d ) 2  y  VOL4DUR  and  d =d -VOL*4dur 2  X  Equation 4-5: Black-Scholes option price  SP - stock price EP - exercise price dur- duration of the option ir - interest rate (risk free interest rate) vol - Volatility of the stock In the securities industry, all of the above variables are usually known, except volatility. Volatility of the stock is its standard deviation (the amount of variation over time). This can Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  50  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  be calculated from the stock's historical performance. The Black-Scholes method of valuing options is not used in determining the value of flexible manufacturing systems. Some consider it unusable because a number of basic assumptions, such as total divisibility, which are unacceptable for investments in manufacturing (and hence mining) systems . It is provided in this thesis as a basic example of how option on stocks were first determined in an analytical manner. 65  A real option to produce metal differs from a stock option in that instead of buying the option to buy (call) or sell (put) a stock at a certain price after a given amount of time, areas of ore can be mined, processed and sold as metal as price fluctuates. For example, buying the flexibility or option to mine a particular stope (by paying for the development costs or designing current excavation to accommodate this flexibility) would allow the mine to extract that ore, if the market price increases to make that stope profitable. 4.2.3.2 Binomial Options Theory Binomial option pricing is a generalization of Black-Scholes. This method of calculating the value of an option is based on a binomial model of metal price fluctuations . For example, over a certain period the price of a metal can either increase or decrease from its value at the beginning of the period. 66  <  P-up  P-down  Figure 4-8: Binomial Fluctuations  Increasing the production from a mine is analogous to a call option (i.e., the mine operator has the right, but not the obligation to produce more metal at any time) . The option to 67  increase production will only be exercised if P>X given that P is the price per unit and X is the cost of production per unit. The figure below simplifies this concept, where the payoff (option value) is governed by metal price.  Azzone, Giovanni and Bertele, Simulation vs.  Analytical Models for the Economic Evaluation of Flexible  Manufacturing Systems: An Option-Based Approach, Economics of Advanced Manufacturing Systems, Edited by Parsaei et. al., Chapman & Hall, London, 1992 Luenberger, D. G., Investment Science. Oxford University Press, 1998, p. 341-342 Dunbar, W. 1998, Ibid 6 6 6 7  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  51  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  Payoff  Option Payoff = max(P - X,0) Metal Price, P  Figure 4-9: Option Payoff  An example of the application of valuation of strategic flexibility is presented below, it has been adapted from an example provided by Dunbar . The example assigns a value to a 68  technology/methodology that can allow a gold mine to increase capacity in the event of a price increase. The following variables are used in the example: Mine life Production rate, M, Production cost, X Risk-free discount rate Price P = Upward u = Downwardd =  10 years 10,000 oz/year $200/oz 5% $300/oz 1.1 0.9  The lattice of gold prices below is calculated using binomials. For example, over the 10 year life of the mine, the price can either increase by 10% (u=l.l) or decrease at a rate of 10% (d=.9). Hence, if in thefirstyear the price of gold increases, from 300 to 330, then decreases in the following year, the price would fall to 297. Table 4-17: Binomial price lattice for gold over a 10 year period Year  300  330.0 270.0  363.0 297.0 243.0  399.3 326.7 267.3 218.7  4 439.2 359.4 294.0 240.6 196.8  5 483.2 395.3 323.4 264.6 216.5 177.1  6 531.5 434.8 355.8 291.1 238.2 194.9 159.4  7 584.6 478.3 391.4 320.2 262.0 214.3 175.4 143.5  8 643.1 526.2 430.5 352.2 288.2 235.8 192.9 157.8 129.1  9 10 707.4 778.1 578.8 636.6 473.5 520.9 387.4 426.2 317.0 348.7 259.4 285.3 212.2 233.4 173.6 191.0 142.1 156.3 116.2 127.8 104.6  The values of the gold mined (including all capital and operating costs) is presented in the table below. Table 4-18: Value of gold production (Smillion) using gold pricefluctuationsand mine model  6 8  Dunbar, W. 1998, Ibid  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  1 14.07 8.93  2 14.73 9.70 5.60  52  3 15.05 10.21 6.25 3.07  4 14.95 10.38 6.65 3.61 1.31  Year 5 14.35 10.17 6.74 3.94 1.70 0.38  6 13.15 9.47 6.46 4.00 1.99 0.52 0.04  7 11.26 8.22 5.74 3.70 2.04 0.71 0.06 0.00  8 8.53 6.30 4.48 2.99 1.77 0.77 0.08 0.00 0.00  9 4.83 3.61 2.61 1.79 1.11 0.57 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00  10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00  Consider a technology or modification that allows a capacity expansion or contraction at any time. The cost of the technology is $1.2 million, with potential production rate increase to 12 000 oz/year and production costs increase to $215/oz. Assuming that the modification was in place, the previous table is re-calculated and presented below. Table 4-19: Value of gold production with design modification 1 15.61 9.45  2 16.51 10.48 5.59  3 17.02 11.21 6.47 2.74  4 17.02 11.55 7.07 3.44 1.02  Year 5 16.44 11.42 7.31 3.96 1.35 0.22  6 15.15 10.73 7.12 4.16 1.77 0.31 0.00  7 13.02 9.37 6.39 3.95 1.96 0.43 0.00 0.00  8 9.90 7.23 5.04 3.25 1.79 0.60 0.00 0.00 0.00  9 5.63 4.16 2.95 1.97 1.17 0.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00  10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00  The value of the design modification is given by subtracting base case from the enhanced version, therefore: $14.37-$13.13=$1.24 million. This technology will (most likely) not be purchased since the $40 000 profit is marginal. See the appendices for the theory and equations behind the explanations above. 4.2.3.3 Azzone's option-based model for Manufacturing systems  Azzone , developed a model that aims at evaluating the value of flexibility for manufacturing systems, based on the ability to mix or produce variable products. An example of this type of flexibility in mining is the blending that occasionally occurs in coal mines. Customers specify the various grades of coal according to their needs. If a coal mine has the ability to change its sequencing and dispatch to achieve this specific grade (product) from varying ore benches throughout the mine, it may be able to take advantage of price 69  Azzone, Ibid, p. 134-135  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  53  fluctuation for certain products.  In o r d e r to c h a n g e f r o m p r o d u c i n g o n e p r o d u c t to another, a  c h a n g e o r a d a p t a t i o n c o s t ( A C ) is i n c u r r e d .  T h i s change cost m a y include r e m o v i n g waste  r o c k to e x p o s e a s p e c i f i c grade o f ore o r b u i l d i n g a h a u l r o a d to a c c e s s a s p e c i f i c g r a d e o f ore. If p l a n n e d c o r r e c t l y , this p r o d u c t m i x c h a n g e w i l l create a cash f l o w ( C F ) . T h e p r o d u c t m i x c h a n g e s w i l l b e i n t r o d u c e d (the o p t i o n w i l l b e e x e r c i s e d ) o n l y i f the c a s h f l o w s a r e h i g h e r t h a n the a d a p t a t i o n costs ( C F > A C ) , c r e a t i n g a p a y o f f C F - A C .  T h i s f l e x i b i l i t y c a n affect a s y s t e m , a c c o r d i n g to this m o d e l , i n t w o  ways.  F i r s t , b y r e d u c i n g the A C , the c o m p a n y c a n a f f o r d to u n d e r t a k e m o r e p r o d u c t m i x c h a n g e s that c a n p o t e n t i a l l y algorithm  that  is  increase  cash flow.  connected  to  the  F o r example,  truck  a u t o m a t i c a l l y a l l o c a t e t r u c k s s o that t h e n e w  dispatch  consider a technology and  geological  database  as  that  an can  b l e n d s are f o r m e d , o p t i m i z i n g p r o f i t a b i l i t y (a  r e l a t i v e l y s i m p l e p r o b l e m that c a n b e s o l v e d u s i n g l i n e a r p r o g r a m m i n g ) . p r o b a b i l i t y , p ( C F ) that these p r o d u c t s w i l l be the market place m a y be an u n k n o w n factor.  such  ideal product m i x  T h i s increases (Knowledge  of  the the  I n m a n u f a c t u r i n g t h i s u n c e r t a i n t y is m i n i m i z e d b y  m a r k e t r e s e a r c h t o d e t e r m i n e w h i c h p r o d u c t is d e m a n d e d b y c o n s u m e r s ) .  S e c o n d , t h e n e t v a l u e o f e a c h a c c e p t a b l e p r o d u c t m i x c h a n g e i n c r e a s e s t h e p a y o f f ( p a y o f f is C F - A C , therefore  i f A C decreases, p a y o f f increases).  A c c o r d i n g to t h e s e a s s u m p t i o n s ,  the  v a l u e o f f l e x i b i l i t y c a n be c a l c u l a t e d u s i n g the e q u a t i o n b e l o w : +»  V= \(CF -  AC)p(CF)dCF  AC Equation 4-6: Value of flexibility The  m o d e l m a y a s s u m e that t h e C F h a s a n o r m a l d i s t r i b u t i o n , N ( a ; s )  (the p r o b a b i l i t y o f a  c e r t a i n c a s h f l o w w i l l v a r y a c c o r d i n g to a n o r m a l c u r v e , a c c o r d i n g to m e a n a a n d a s t a n d a r d d e v i a t i o n o f s), as s e e n i n the f i g u r e b e l o w .  U s i n g this a s s u m p t i o n , the f o l l o w i n g  equation  c a n b e d e r i v e d b y e v a l u a t i o n o f t h e i n t e g r a l i n E q u a t i o n 4-6  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  /  54  1  0 r  AC  CF  Figure 4-10: Normal Curve distribution p(CF) vs C F -(a-ACY 2s  2  7 0  AC-a^'  f  + {a-AC) \-F\  v Equation 4-7: Value of flexibility assuming a normal distribution  a = mean s = variance V = value - And where F(X) is the cumulative probability at x of a normal distribution having a mean of a and a variance of s. (X= (AC-a)/s) A numerical example using the coal mine analogy, described above (with products that vary in grade), is demonstrated below. The increase in product flexibility could lead to a reduction in product change cost from $100 000 to $35 000. Preliminary discussions with metallurgical coal buyers show that the probability of annual demand of the new product mixes is 0.6 (the product may change 0.6 times per year). Based on records and expert market analysis by the marketing department, the company estimates that the cash flow from each new coal-mix opportunity can be described by a normal distribution N(175 000; 70 000). Using the equation above, and a spread-sheet, the value for the base case (operating as usual), was found to be: i r  V =  70000  ,— e -42n  -(175000-lOOOOQ)  2  2x70000  2  + (75000) 1 - F  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  75000 70000  =$90264  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  55  and the value of changing the product mix using the technology, V=  70000  -(175000-21000)  e  2  2x70000*  /154000 + (154000) 1 - F = $155527 , 70000 j v  Therefore, the difference between the base case and technological methods of changing the product mix is $155 527-$90 264=$65 263. Considering an estimated probable annual demand of 0.6, the value of the technology's flexibility is $39 158, or roughly $40 000 per year. This value should be added to the cash flow analysis (the level 1 justification evaluation). The assumptions made for the example above can be changed, as new or more precise information becomes available. For example, if the cash flow from new product mixes is not truly a normal distribution, its cumulative probability function, 'F(X)' would be changed. 4.3  Level 3 Justification  Schemes  - Risk & Analytic  Methods  Analytic techniques are primarily quantitative and are more complex than economic approaches. The essential characteristic that makes analytic methods better suited for evaluating complex technologies is that they tend to capture more information. These methods can all, to a varying degree, quantify qualitative benefits and costs. Level 3 justification schemes also consider uncertainty and multiple causes and effects. A further advantage is that these methods are more realistic by taking more factors and subjective judgements into account . 71  The disadvantages of these methods are considerable, mainly due to the traditionalism embraced by managers in the mining industry. For instance, since the analysis is less easily comprehended and more time consuming, fewer managers use this method when justifying or considering approval of a project. A further disadvantage of this method is the large amount of data required when compared to economic methods. At this level of justification, the approaches are called decision support. Most of these methods supply added information to the evaluation giving managers a more knowledgeable view to make better judgements on what avenue to pursue. The methods that are to be described in this section are: Value analysis: a method that can provide experience with the technology and empirical results that can be used in a financial analysis, thereby reducing risk.  7 1  Azzone, Ibid, p. 136 Meredith and Suresh, Ibid, p. 1046  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  56  Decision Analysis: this method is similar to risk analysis, where probabilities are used to calculate the risk involved, the potential income and the possible outcomes. This method uses figures such as the certainty equivalent value (CEV) and utility functions that can be inserted into the financial appraisal in order to take into account a more realistic view of risk. Risk Analysis: where a series of scenarios are simulated to determine which of several possible investment projects should be choosen. Decision and risk analysis can be very involved, and so only simplified examples will be used here to illustrate these methods. 4.3.1  Value Analysis  This justification approach was used by Keen (1981) in the assessment of an advanced technology. The method involves two main stages. The first stage, called the pilot stage, the investment is considered as a research & development project rather than an investment. The decision to proceed with the pilot stage is justified mainly on estimated quantified benefits. The pilot involves a scaled-down version of the proposed system that will allow some of the main benefits to be determined. The pilot phase costs are kept relatively low. Once the pilot stage is finished, the expected and unexpected benefits are evaluated to confirm the project's value to the firm. This exercise also allows evaluators to determine the quantifiable benefits of the qualitative aspects of the project. If the costs and benefits are acceptable, and the riskiness (determined from experience with the limited system) is acceptable, then the full scaleproject would be accepted. This method also allows the reduction of risk since potential problems can be monitored or corrected once they are identified in the pilot stage. This second phase is known as the build stage. This method, originally suggested for the manufacturing and information systems industry, can also be easily applied to mining. The difficulty lies in the ability of the supplier of the industry to sell a limited 'sample' of the technology for evaluation. A mining example of this evaluation method can be outfitting a single drill with a GPS drill monitoring platform at a mine where there are several drills in the fleet or modifying a single production train. The worth of the predicted benefits and the unpredicted effects of the qualitative benefits will become apparent. The synergistic benefits of the system could only be calculated once the entire drill fleet is outfitted with similar systems. 4.3.2  Decision Analysis  Decision analysis is used in many fields including: energy, manufacturing and service industries, medicine, sports, public policy, marketing and space exploration. Decision Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  57  analysis is defined as ".. .the study of how people make decisions, particularly when faced with imperfect or uncertain information, as well as a collection of techniques to support the analysis of decision problems."  72  Many of the models used in level 2 justification schemes identify best solutions or the optimal mix of products (in this case technology).  These methods support the decision  making however, little uncertainty can be introduced.  In reality, people make decisions,  where risk plays an important role in an individual's final decision.  Another distinction  between programming models and decision analysis is that a continuous range of solutions is possible for optimization models.  Decision analysis studies a limited number of options  available to the decision maker.  The options and outcomes can be, to a certain extent,  qualitative, where numerical values are placed on non-numeric benefits and costs. Decision analysis requires a substantial amount o f background information and an understanding of the system under study. advantage: a blueprint for implementation.  Collecting the information provides another For complex, expensive projects, a team  representing all the affected departments is usually assembled to ease the implementation. Decision Analysis (DA) requires the inter-departmental team to work as a group to solve and analyze the various decisions and options available to the situation.  D A also requires  information that can only be provided by that team. The analysis is also conducted with the team's input.  Therefore member of the various business units are able to understand the  vision and difficulties of the project, allowing a smoother integration into the overall process . 73  Define the problem Identify options  |  Develop the decision model  T  Quantify judgements about uncertainty  T  Calculate the EVfor each alternative I  Re-think problem  I  I Implement the best alternative  Figure 4-11: Decision Analysis Process Camm, Jeffery D. and James R. Evans. Ibid, p.631 Winston, Ibid., p.392  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  58  This section will investigate decision analysis as a CIA method. The diagram above represents the decision analysis process. This diagram is based on a suggested method of how to undertake a decision analysis. All these steps will not be explained or shown in an example, however, the tools necessary to complete the decision model, quantify judgements and calculate the expected value (EV) will be shown. Expected value (EV), is also commonly represented as expected monetary value (EMV). Decision trees and other forms of analyzing and interpreting decision analysis will be shown. Examples will be provided to explain some concepts. 74  4.3.2.1 Payoff Table  Payoff tables to conveniently represent monetary outcomes for a given situation. A payoff is the value of making a decision D, having a state of nature S. There are usually several different states of nature (possible outcomes). A payoff table is represented by the matrix below, where payoffs are represented by the expression V(Dj, Sj). Table 4-20:Payoff Table Structure  States of Nature Decisions V(D„S,)  D  2  V^S^  V(D„S ) V^.Sa) V(D ,S ) V(D ,S ) 2  2  2  2  3  A numerical example of a payoff table: A gold mining company, PT, has 3 million dollars to invest. PT has three choices: put it into liquid reserves (treasury bonds, similar to a bank CD), reinvest it into the existing mines or spend it on exploration. These represent the decisions Di, D and D . Each option has different levels of risk and profit. The value of each option is based on the price of gold. If the price gold can reduce, stay constant or increase (Low, no change and high), these are the states of nature Si, S and S3. The outcome were evaluated and shown in the payoff table below. 2  3  2  Table 4-21: Payoff Example results  Options Reserves Reinvest Exploration  74  Outcomes ($ 000,000's) Low no change High 3 3 3 -1 5 6 -3 4 10  Schuyler, John R., Decision Analysis in Projects., Project Management Institute, 1996  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  59  4.3.2.2 Expected Value In the payoff example above, risk was an inherent part of the problem, however, the payoff tables were not able to reflect the different probabilistic information. The uncertainties relating to the different states of nature can be taken into account by using the expected value approach. The expected values of each option can be calculated according to the equation below: S(A)  =  £P(S  Y  )F(D,,S,)  7=1  Equation 4-8: Expected Value  In the above equation, P(Sj) is the probability that the state of nature Sj will occur. The value V(Dj,Sj) is the payoff that occurs when decision D, is made and state of nature Sj occurred. The example above is continued, using the probabilities 0.3, 0.55 and 0.15 for the probability that the price of gold decreases, stays the same, and increases, respectively. The problem can be solved as seen in the table below. Table 4-22: Expected Value Example Results  Probabilities Reserves Reinvest Exploration  Outcomes ($ 000,000's) Low no change High 0.3 0.55 0.15 3 3 3 -1 5 6 -3 4 10  EV  3 3.35 2.8  A sample calculation for the 'reinvest' expected value is: (.3)(-3) + (.55)(4) + (.15)(10) = -0.9 + 2.2 + 1.5 = 2.8 Therefore the recommended decision would be the highest EV (for that decision). In the example above this would be the 'reinvest' option. The information can be better represented in a graphical structure called a decision tree. 4.3.2.3 Decision Trees A decision tree is a graphical representation of a decision situation . terminology of decision trees abide by the following conventions: 75  •  Decision nodes are represented by squares  •  Decision branches stem from decision nodes  The formal  Camm, Ibid, p.636  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  60  •  State of nature nodes are represented by circles  •  State of nature branches stem from state of nature nodes  The figure below represents a decision tree. There is no formal limit to the number of decisions or the structure of the decisions. For the purpose of clarity, a single layered decision tree is presented below. The value V(Dj,Sj) is the payoff of the Dj option for Sj state of nature. V(Dj) is the expected value of that decision. The optimal solution would be to select the decision with the highest expected value. VfA.S,) VfA.Sa)  Vf.Da.S,) V(D ,S ) 2  2  V(D ,S ) 2  3  Figure 4-12: Decision tree  The V(Dj) is calculated by the equation below. The process of back-calculating the value of the decision is known as 'folding back'. V(D,) =  f V(D ,S )*S j  !  J  J  7=1  Equation 4-9: expected value of decision  To continue the example above, the values are entered into the tree. The resulting decision tree appears as shown below. In this example, the reinvestment decision is the should be chosen since it has the highest value (3.35).  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  61  All numerical values in millions of dollars Figure 4-13: Decision Tree Example  4.3.2.4 Expected Value of Perfect Information (EVPI)  Perfect information is impossible, however, it is convenient to know how much money can be spent to improve the value of the decision, if such information existed. The term 'perfect information' relates to information that would reveal exactly what state of nature will occur. EVPI is defined as the difference between the expected payoff under perfect information and the expected payoff of the optimal decision without perfect information . If the example above is continued, the EVPI can be calculated as follows: using the below table, 76  Table 4-23: Data Required for EVPI calculation State o f Nature Decision Low Reserves no change Reinvest High Exploration  Payoff Probability 3 0.3 6 0.55 10 0.15  The expected payoff under perfect information is found to be (3)(0.3) + (6)(0.55) + (10)(0.15) = 5.7  and the expected value of perfect information is 5.7-3.35 = 2.35  Camm, Ibid, p.641  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  62  4.3.2.5 Multistage Decisions  The example above is a situation where there is only a single decision to make. Most situations are more complex, in which several subsequent decisions can be made in a certain situation once the effects of the previous decisions are known. Example: An underground nickel mining company, UNMC, is considering investing in a fleet of Teleguided LHDs. The technology is new so several non-quantifiable aspects may hinder the overall performance and make the investment unprofitable. Problems such as labor relations and maintenance may pose difficulties in calculating cost savings. There are qualitative benefits such as safety and flexibility, but they are not considered to be of prime importance. The mine management is familiar with advanced justification techniques, therefore a value analysis program is contemplated. There are three initial decisions available: continue operating using the conventional LHD fleet, upgrade immediately to a fully Tele-operated fleet or test a single Tele-operated LHD in the mine to evaluate the attitudes of the workforce and maintenance requirements. Once the evaluation is completed (value analysis has been completed), the remaining options may be to abandon the Tele-operation and continue operating using the conventional LHD fleet, or to upgrade to a Tele-operated LHD fleet. A negative outcome of the value analysis does not automatically exclude the option of upgrading the fleet. The value analysis may have had some extraneous circumstances that would not affect the success of the Tele-fleet. The costs of the upgrades are presented in the table below Table 4-24: Financial data for UNMC example  Values in '000,000's Costs Benefits Tele-fleet 1 Tele-LHD  ($4.5) ($1.5)-  $15.0  The decisions faced by management can be set up according to the decision tree seen below. Note that the different outcomes, 'success' and 'failure' represent the situation where the Telefleet performs up to expectations (in so far as cost savings) or fails to perform, in which case the cost of the modifications to the LHDs and the lost production is considered to be a loss. These final conclusions are not limited to only one or two outcomes. A 'moderate success' or 'moderate failure' or 'no change' outcome can be included if desired. If the value analysis is abandoned, the cost of a single alteration (installing equipment required to Tele-operate a conventional LHD) and training of a few operators is considered to be a loss.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  63  alteration  alteration  Figure 4-14: Multi-stage Decision tree  It can be seen in the diagram above that the probabilities of success/failure for immediate implementation may be different from those that follow the value analysis due to information that will be received once the value analysis has been completed. These probabilities can be estimated accurately and realistically by using Baye's Theorem. 4.3.2.6 Baye's T h e o r e m  Baye's Theorem was developed by an 18 century British clergyman, Rev. Thomas Bayes . The applicable aspect of the theorem is explained below, using the example that has been continued from the previous sub-section. th  77  The situation in the example has three types of probabilities: 1. Probability of success/failure if immediate implementation is decided 2. Probability of positive/negative evaluation of the technology in the value analysis 3. Probability of success/failure of Tele-operation implementation once value analysis outcome is known. From the diagram above, it can be seen that the value analysis branch attempts to evaluate whether or not the fleet should be committed to Tele-operation. In the decision where the fleet is committed immediately, the probabilities of success or failure will be different than in the decision that is made once information has been obtained from the value analysis. This additional information provides an indicator of which state of nature may occur. According to convention, the initial probabilities assigned to a state of nature are called 'prior probabilities'. Once information regarding the most likely state of nature has been obtained, the readjusted probabilities are labeled 'posterior probabilities'. In terms of statistical terminology, the following can be stated as a conditional probability: Schuyler, Ibid, p. 3 9  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  •  64  P(Sj|I ) is the probability of the state of nature Sj occurring given the indicator I*. k  Indicator information is not completely reliable. Some tests may not reveal the true state of nature. The indicator reliabilities are defined in statistical terms as follows: •  P(Ik | Sj) is the probability that Sj is the true state of nature given the indicator I . k  Continuing the example we consider the following probabilities. After a preliminary analysis, there is a probability of .65 that the immediate implementation of the Tele-fleet will be a success. Therefore there is a probability of .35 (1-.65) that the Tele-fleet will fail upon immediate implementation. The probability of P(I | Sj) (indicator reliability) can be determined through historical results. k  Considering the example being used throughout this section, suppose UNMC has come across 34 different technologies into the mine over its previous 20 years of life. Of the 34 technologies, 30 where pre-evaluated using value analysis. The number of positive evaluations after the value analysis was 23. Of the 23 technologies that were deemed valuable, 21 were implemented. Of the 21 implemented, 19 were successes and two failures. Of the 7 technologies that were deemed unfit for further implementation, 3 were implemented due to various reasons. Of the 3 implemented, one was a success. This data is summarized in the table below. Table 4-25: Historical Data  # # # #  of Technologies of implemented of Technologies of Technologies  Historical Data: implemented or tested technologies succeeded failed  34 29 20 9  # of Technologies evaluated using V.A. Total # of successes Total # of Failures  30 20 10  Value Analysis Historical Data Predicted to be successful Amount implmeted Successes Failures  23 22 19 3  Predicted to be failures Amount implemented Successes Failures  7 3 1 2  The prior probabilities can be calculated using this historical information. The table below shows the prior probabilities with sample calculations immediately below the table.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  65  Table 4-26: Prior Probabilities Prob. of immediate implmentation Success 0.69 Failure 0.31 If indicator gives positive evaluation Success 0.86 Failure 0.14 Implement 0.96 Abandon 0.04 gives negative eva uation Success 0.33 Failure 0.67 Implement 0.43 Abandon 0.57  Sample calculation for immediate implementation probability: Since 9 of all 29 implemented technologies were considered failures probability that another technology is considered a failure is 9/29=.31. Therefore probability of success is 1-.31=.69. Sample calculation, indicator gives positive evaluation. Since 19 projects were considered successes after implementation and a value analysis evaluation of positive, the success probability given these conditions is calculated by 19/22 = .86. It is clear from the historical data above, that value analyses conducted by UNMC is better at predicting successes than failures. Prior probabilities can be used to calculate the posterior probabilities using the Bayesian theorem as follows: Pr(*M)= 1  ,  ?  '  (  A  ^  ?r(A\B)?r(B) + ?r(A\B')?r(B')  Equation 4-10: Equation showing Bayesian principle  In the equation above, Pr(B | A) is read as the probability that B will occur given A. For the purpose of this example, the value B represents the state of nature that the project succeeds following implementation, while the variable B' represents the state of nature where the project fails. The variable A represents the state of nature that the value analysis renders a positive evaluation of the technology. The solution below calculates the probability that the project will succeed given a positive evaluation of the value analysis. The left side of the equation can be read: "the probability that the project will succeed given a positive evaluation." ft(4o1  **4*>***>  , ?r(A\B)?r(B) + ?r(A\B')?r(B')  -  <*m  (.86)(.69) + (.33)(.31)  =™..85  .70  The denominator of the above equation is equivalent to the probability of a positive evaluation of the value analysis. Therefore the probabilities of a successful evaluation is .70  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  66  while the probability of a negative evaluation is .3. The probability that the project will succeed given a negative evaluation is calculated: ?T(A'\B)?T(B)  Pr(B\A ) =  PT(A'\B)?r(B)  + ?r(A'\B')?r(B')  (.14)(.69) (.14)(.69) + (.77)(.31)  .10 = .29 .34  The posterior probabilities are summarized in the table below. The discrepancies between the table and the sample calculations above are due to significant figures. Table 4-27: Posterior Probabilities Pr(B 1 A) Pr(B' 1 A) Pr(F3 1 A') Pr(B' 1 A') Pr(A) Pr(A')  Probability 0.85 0.15 0.31 0.69  Reads Prob. of success given a positive evaluation Prob. of failure given a positive evaluation Prob. of successl given a negative evaluation Prob. of failure given a negative evaluation  0.70 probability of positive evaluation 0.30 probability of negative evaluation  Since all the probabilities have been calculated, the final decision tree can be formulated: 0.85  ^$10.5 ($4.5)  Positive Outcome ($0.78) Negative Outcome  i$1.5) $10.5 ($4.5)  Figure 4-15: Decision Tree for UNMC example  From the above diagram, it can be seen that UNMC should directly implement the Tele-fleet. However, the difference between the two decisions is not very important. The above analysis is only as accurate as the initial assumptions. As part of the decision analysis methodology, a sensitivity analysis should be conducted.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  67  4.3.2.7 Sensitivity Analysis  Sensitivity analysis is useful in determining which variables in an evaluation are most influential . Project risk management depends on prioritizing uncertainties and options available. Once a decision tree is set-up on a spreadsheet, it is relatively easy to perform a sensitivity analysis. Sensitivity analysis is a method of determining the effect of varying certain variables. In this example, one of the most uncertain variables is the benefit predicted if the Tele-fleet implementation is successful. Instead of 15 million dollars, a total of 8 million will be used as the possible benefit of operating the mine with a Tele-fleet. Furthermore, the cost of abandonment will be raised to a cost of 2 million. The decision tree reflecting these new figures is presented below: 78  Figure 4-16: Sensitivity Analysis Decision Tree  From the decision tree presented above, the proper decision is the same decision as before: to invest directly in a Tele-Fleet. However, it is still very clear which decision to make. The EMV of the two automation decisions are very close and almost the same as the 'do not invest decision'. Further study of the values will be required to 'solidify' the values of the probabilities, benefits and costs. The decision, at marginal profit levels, as seen above, is subjective to the risk preference of the manager or corporation making the decision. Their risk characteristics being either risk takers or risk evaders will reflect on the final decision. A subjective way of measuring the risk preference of a corporation or individual can be calculated using utility theory. 4.3.2.8 Utility Theory  Utility theory was designed to quantify the inconsistencies in human nature where different decision-makers have varying views towards risk. There are many occasions in which people 78  Camm, Jeffery D., Ibid, p. 20  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  68  make decisions that do not conform to basic expected values . This phenomenon can best be illustrated using a non-mining example. Consider individuals who purchase lottery tickets. The expected value is negative, however, the chance of winning a million dollars, even if it is highly unlikely, is more attractive than losing a dollar. Another example is in the case of insurance. Much more money is paid into insurance premiums than the calculated EV; however, it is much more unattractive to lose a thousand dollars than it is to possibly lose ten thousand. Therefore it can be seen that the worth of decisions include something other than the monetary value of the payoffs. This total worth of a particular payoff is called utility. When a rational person or organization chooses to select a decision that does not maximize the expected monetary value, he/she/they may be maximizing the expected utility. Using utility theory to reflect an individual or organization's attitude towards risk will help the individual to select the decision that maximizes the utility. 79  Assigning an individual or organization's utility is not easy. It involves asking the individual or individuals comprising the group a set of question that establishes their risk preference, being either risk averse, risk neutral, or risk seeker. An example of how to assess and apply utility is provided in an example below. The example being used in the previous subsections is continued here. The manager of UNMC currently faces a decision to either invest in a Tele-fleet or continue to operate in the present manner. A decision analyst attempts to determine the manager's risk preference by asking a series of questions. Thefirstquestion is what the manager perceives as being the worst and best payoff possible. The manager responds by saying that a —4.5 and 10.5 million dollars is the worst and best payoff possible. The decision analyst can now assign -4.5 million as having a utility value of 0 and 10.5 million a utility value of 1. The next questions would present the following situation: The manager has a choice between the following options: 1. payoff of X or 2. the possibility of wining 10.5 million with probability p or losing 4.5 million with a probability of 1-p Suppose the decision analyst chooses 9 million dollars as X. A decision tree can be set up to better represent the options, as seen below. The manager must choose a value of p such that he is indifferent as to which option to select. Suppose he decides on a probability of .8.  Hanna, Micheal., Introduction Thomson Publishing, 1996, p. 558  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  to Management Science: Mastering Quantitative Analysis., International  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  69  Therefore he is indifferent between being paid 9 million dollars or gambling on the chance to win 10.5 at a probability of .8 or lose 4.5 million at a probability of .2. The decision analyst then proceeds to ask the same questions, except substituting different values for X, such as 8.5 to -3.5 million dollars. The probabilities given by the hypothetical manager of UNMC are summarized in the table below. This data can be viewed in a chart called a utility curve, which can be seen below the table Table 4-28:Decision Analysis Example - Manager's responses Option 1 Payoff -4.5 -3.5 -2.5 -0.5 1.5 4.5 6.5 8.5 10.5  p  Option 2 EMV 0 -4.5 0.2 -1.5 0.38 1.2 0.58 4.2 0.7 6 0.8 7.5 0.85 8.25 0.92 9.3 1 10.5  1  •• ••  0.9 -  •  0.8 Probabilities  0.7 -  •  • •  ov 0.5 •  0.4 0.3 0.2 -  •  0.1 n  t  f  -4 .5  I  -2.5  -0.5  i  i  i  1.5 3.5 5.5 Payoff ($'000,000)  i  i  7.5  9.5  11  .5  Figure 4-17:Utility Curve for UNMC manager  The manager is considered a 'risk averse' decision maker. For example, he would rather pay 3.5 million dollars outright than risk the chance on a gamble with an expected monetary value of-1.5 million dollars. The risk curves for different preferences can be seen in the figure below.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  70  Monetary Payoff Figure 4-18: Utility Curves for Various Risk Preferences  80  Using the utility curves, a decision tree can be altered so that decisions are based on maximized utility. The example from the previous subsection can illustrate this procedure. The values of the payoffs in the decision tree are replaced by their utility equivalent, determined by using the manager's utility curve. The utility values replace the payoffs in the decision tree. Once the decision tree is folded back, the decision tree with the highest utility is the ideal decision when considering the manager's risk preferences. According to the figure below, the decision which most suits the manager's risk profile is to avoid investing in technology altogether since the payoff of 0 has a utility of .6. This reduces the risk of the eventual outcome thereby maximizing the utility. If the company decides to invest in technology, the manager would first evaluate the Tele-operation technology by evaluating its performance through a value analysis procedure since it has the second highest utility value.  Hanna, Ibid., p.563  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  71  Figure 4-19: Decision Tree using Utility values  A measure called the Certainty Equivalent is sometimes worthy of consideration. The Certainty Equivalent of a situation is the value at which a company or individual would be indifferent between engaging in the project or paying (or being paid) a certain payoff. In the example used above, suppose the manager would rather pay 1.5 million dollars to avoid investing in Tele-operation technology. Hence, the certainty equivalent for this situation and this manager is -1.5 million dollars. If the manager were a risk seeker, perhaps the certainty equivalent would be closer to the highest EMV of 5.84 million dollars (for the pre-sensitivity analysis decision tree). Determining the utility curves for certain groups or companies is difficult since the various individuals in the group or the people in charge of the company have different views on risk. Furthermore, the process requires the decision analyst to pose hypothetical alternatives involving uncertain outcomes which can be confusing for those being assessed. Some utility functions have been derived based on empirical evidence collected by Ronald Howard . The equation has the following form: 81  U(x)  = 1-  i  X//R  Equation 4-11: Utitlity Function  The R parameter is risk tolerance, which measures the risk that the decision-maker is willing to tolerate. The x value is a monetary value that is positive if it is a payoff and negative if it is a cost. According to Howard's (same source) consulting experience, large companies have an R according to the following breakdown:  1  Winston, Ibid, p.445  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  72  Table 4-29: Percentages in the Calculation of R Criteria 6.4% net sales 124% net income 15.7% equity  Therefore a company with a net equity of 200 million has a risk tolerance of 31.2 million dollars. These guidelines were derived from many years of experience in the manufacturing industry, but they do not apply well mining because of the industry's inconsistent attitudes towards risk. The risk preference of mining companies is discussed in the following subsection. 4.3.2.9 Mining Companies' attitudes toward Risk  A mining venture can be considered high risk. There is a great deal of financing required for exploration. Exploring for minerals is an uncertain field though necessary for to the survival of the mine or mining company: the mineral industry continually requires new deposits. A company can augment its reserves by acquiring claims; however, this too can be a risky venture (Bre-X was almost acquired by Freeport, then the company discovered that there were no reserves). Reducing costs is also an essential part of the mining business. But, new technology that promises to reduce costs is considered a very risky proposition, given mining's general reluctance to adopt new technology. 4.3.2.10  Discussion of Decision Analysis & Other methods  Formulating decision trees can be a lengthy process. Software does exist that aids in the creation of the graphical interface and calculation procedures required in decision trees; e.g.: Treeplan (for Excel 5.0); however, several decisions are required and each have multiple options and payoffs, the ends of the decision trees can become very 'bushy'. For example, consider a decision with 3 options which each lead to another decision and finally lead to four payoffs each. The final decision tree contains 24 payoffs. This decision tree would be difficult to see graphically due to its size. Furthermore, collecting and assessing the various probabilities, historical data and management characteristics is time consuming. Establishing accurate probabilities can be further complicated if the option under study is unprecedented. Some simple methods of decision making under uncertainty have been established such as the Laplace approach, Maximax (also known as the Optimistic Approach), Maximin (also known as the Pessimistic Approach) and the Minimax Regret. These methods can be used when probabilities are uncertain.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  73  4.3.2.10.1 Laplace approach The Laplace approach consists of taking Laplace's principle of insufficient reason which states that if no reason exists for one state of nature to be more likely than another, then they should be treated as equally as likely . Recall the first example discussed in the Decision Analysis section: the PT mine has 3 million to invest in bonds, operations or exploration. The solution can be determined using the equation shown below: 82  Select the MAX(Di) given that  2X n  D,= ^  n  Equation 4-12: Laplace Decision  D = decision that must be taken, (in this case, bonds, operations or exploration) therefore since there are three decisions possible, /=l,2...m (in this example, m=3) P = possible payoff. The various payoffs are in an array where three possible outcomes are possible,y=l,2...n (in this example, n=3). A numerical example is given below. According to the Laplace method, the three options would have the following values: T -  -J™  Liquid Reserves:  3 +3 +3 „ =3  _ . -1+5+6 Operations: = 3.33 Exploration: —^ + 4 + 10 _ ^ ^ Therefore the exploration option would be chosen. 4.3.2.10.2 Maximax An individual or company with a 'risk seeker' utility curve may choose this option because it chooses the options with the highest gains. In this example, again the exploration option would be chosen, followed by the operation option. The equation below would be used for this method. Solution: choose Dj where i is MAX[Pjj]  82 Hanna, Ibid, p.638  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  74  Equation 4-13: Maximax  4.3.2.10.3 Maximin An individual that is risk averse may choose this method which consists of choosing the option with the most attractive worst case scenario . In this example, the PT mine would first consider investing in a low-yeild (& low risk) bond followed by reinvesting the money in its operations. 83  Solution = choose MAX[Pjj] where j has MIN(AVERAGE(Pj)), or worst case scenario Equation 4-14: Maximin  4.3.2.10.4 Minimax Regret. This approach attempts to quantify the decision maker's regret or opportunity loss, then suggests the option with the lowest regret. The following equation is used to determine the regret value. m  7=1  Equation 4-15: Minimax Regret  For example, consider the case of PT mine choosing to reinvest the money in its operations. If the price of gold lowers, the best decision would have been to invest in the bonds, a gain of 4 million dollars (the difference between 3 and -1 million). If the price of gold increased the exploration option should have been chosen, with a further lost opportunity of 4 million (the 'higher' price of gold result of exploration is 10 million while the 'higher' gold price result of reinvesting in the operation is 6, therefore the value is 10-6). Therefore the total regret for the 'reinvestment in the operation' opportunity is 8 million dollars (4+4). The initial values and Maximum opportunity loss is presented in the table below. The exploration opportunity has the lowest regret, followed by the reinvestment decision. Table 4-30: Minimax Regret Solution  Options Low Reserves Reinvest Exploration  Outcomes ($ 000,000's) no change High Regret 3 3 3 -1 5 6 -3 4 10  9 8 7  Camm, Ibid. pp. 638  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  4.3.2.11  75  Conclusion to Decision Analysis  The methods above do not remedy decision analysis' weaknesses namely, the requirement for accurate probabilities and the inability to properly present decision trees with many options and payoffs. The decision tree is also subject to discrete outcomes, and is unable a easily represent time-based options. Schuyler (1996) considers Monte Carlo simulation as an alternative that can eliminate many of the problems facing the decision tree analysis approach to decision making. Some authors consider simulation as a topic within decision analysis while others consider it under the banner of risk analysis. Due to the importance of this subject, a separate section will be considered here. 4.3.3  Risk Analysis  Risk analysis was popularized by Hertz (1981), who used the method in capital investment. The method relies on simulation of probabilistic factors to both statistically and graphically determine the outcome of a situation. The initial probabilities for the variables can be obtained through historical records or by the subjective opinions of managers. Risk analysis is also known as simulation. This section provides the reasoning for using simulation as a justification tool, then gives a brief history of simulation. A practical example is described and executed in the following two chapters, based on an actual level 3 technology application (the CAES enabled blending project). 4.3.3.1 Simulation as a Justification Tool  Simulation can be used as a justification scheme by revealing the true nature of the uncertainties through sensitivity analysis or by identifying potential problems (if the model is detailed enough). Important variables, that are not always evident, can be identified through sensitivity analysis. Inspecting scenarios that do not perform according to expectations can identify potential problems in the plan; however, the model must be detailed enough to be realistic. 84  A further advantage of using simulation in justification is its applicability to the risk factor. The risk factor, which is of prime importance in the economic justification schemes, can be reduced by simulation since it provides a more precise (if modeled correctly) estimate of the figures used in determining the economic benefits and costs. For example, a higher risk would be applied if guesses, based on instinct or experience, were used in the economic evaluation, instead of a model that can accurately predict the outcomes of the project based on historical data and statistical analysis.  Kulatilaka, Nalin., Ibid., pp. 9 5 9  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 4 - Numerical Examples  76  4.3.3.2 History of Simulation  The most common form of simulation is Monte Carlo simulation. John Von Neumann has been credited for naming and popularizing Monte Carlo techniques while participating in the development of the atomic bomb . He recognized that random sampling of unknown variables could be used to solve mathematical problems that are otherwise impossible to solve. The simulation process involves two main elements: a model that can project the outcome value and a method of repeatedly generating scenarios through randomly sampled probabilities . Simulations can be either discrete or continuous. Several simulation software packages are available such as Extend or AweSim. Simulation can even be performed on spreadsheets. 85  86  Schuyler, Ibid., p.43 Hurrion, R.D., Simulation., IFS (Publications) Ltd., UK., 1986  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  5  77  B a c k g r o u n d to Practical E x a m p l e s  The thesis has so far reviewed the management science theory considered to be applicable to the justification of new technology to the mining industry. The CIA methods were applied to the various technologies used or being contemplated for use at the Highland Valley Copper Mine. This chapter focuses on the background information required to understand the mine environment, how the technology is applied, and the financial and managerial realities at HVC. The results of the application of these justification techniques are presented in the next chapter. This chapter begins by providing the chronology of the data collection and interpretation phase of the study. A general description of the mine familiarizes the reader with the key factors influencing the mine. The focus of this introduction is to present the background information required to explain the technologies under study and understand their impact on the mine. There are two technologies that will be used to present the three levels of CIA methods. The first, the AQUILA drill monitoring technology, is used as an example of the application of the level 1 and 2 justification techniques that apply in that particular situation. Therefore a detailed review of the drilling and blasting procedures at HVC will be presented. Since this technology has largely been implemented, the discussion in the next chapter provides a comparison between pre and post implementation engineering and operational procedures of drilling and blasting. This chapter describes the pre-implementation situation and concludes by providing the reasoning behind the level 2 classification. The second new technology, Caterpillar's CAES, will be analyzed so that the appropriate justification methods are applied. The technology is a key part of a larger project to design the mine output to conform to the ideal mill feed. A complete description of the current mine-mill planning and design interface is provided along with a description of the current flows of information and ore within the mine. 5.1  Chronology  of  Research  Direct observations and raw data were collected over a period of seven months in three field study periods. An initial investigation period, in March 1998, presented the project to the mine management to gain formal approval, collect primary data and to organize subsequent field work during the summer. The summer data collection period was throughout the month of July. Senior HVC engineering staff requested that the UBC study include a post-audit on the Application of Financial Expenditure (AFE) relating to the AQUILA drill technology. This data was  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  78  needed for the management science CIA methods. Some of the justification techniques were discussed and a formal example of the techniques presented in the AFE audit. The engineering and mill planning staff at HVC were also evaluating a second, more integrated technology. Caterpillar's Computer Aided Earth-moving System (CAES) was a technology that was seen as beneficial to both mill and mine since it could be used in the mine to improve feed characteristics to the mill, as explained later in this chapter. The AFE for this technology had been already written, evaluated, and declined by the upper management of the mine. (A copy of the original AFE is included in an appendix.) The AFE for the CAES used level 1 justification schemes to justify a level 3 technology. Level 1 justification schemes were used to justify the technology since these were the only techniques known to both the author of the AFE (the senior mine engineer) and mine management at the time. The UBC study proposed to re-evaluate the technology using the appropriate justification schemes and present the results to mine management. This prompted a third visit in September to collect the data required to apply the level 3 justification schemes. This data was therefore collected with the intention of completing a simulation for justification purposes.  5.2 Highland Valley Copper Mine: Background Information This section presents the basic characteristics of the mine. This will allow the reader to be familiar with the main engineering and operating variables governing the mine performance. 5.2.1  Location  The Highland Valley Copper mine is located in south central British Columbia. The mine is accessed by Highway 97C, 17 kilometers west of the town of Logan Lake and 75 km southwest of Kamloops.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  79  5.2.2 Production Statistics Two pits, the Lornex and Valley, are mined using a truck and shovel fleet. There are 3 49R rotary drills, each equipped with AQUILA monitoring systems. There are 7 shovels, 1 frontend loader, 34 haulage trucks (all of common capacity) and various service equipment. Two ore shovels operate in the Valley pit and a single ore shovel services the Lornex pit. The stripping ratio is approximately 1:1, where 261 000 tons of rock are mined daily . There are two semi-mobile in-pit crushers in the Valley pit, side-by-side feeding a twin conveyor system that is capable of conveying 6000 tons per hour and which deposits all ore onto three surge piles, which are drawn into the mill using conveyor systems. The exact network of this system is an important part of the CAES project and will be further discussed in the next section. 88  The HVC mill processes about 130 000 tons per day. In 1997, HVC produced 391,951 tons of copper sulfide concentrates containing 346 million pounds of copper . Concentrate of 1100 tons, with a copper grade of 40% is produced daily, which is trucked out to a rail line, that services a port facility, where the concentrate is shipped to smelters in Japan, Pacific Rim Countries and Canada. The mine also produces 1.8 million kilograms of molybdenum a year. HVC has long-term contracts for over 90% of its copper-concentrate. Annual or biennial re-negotiation of smelter terms are conducted to reflect market conditions. 89  Some of the major costs include labor, which is approximately $98 million annually, or about 39% of 1997's budget. Energy is another major cost, including diesel fuel/gasoline, natural gas and electricity. In 1997, $46 million, or 18% of the budget was spent on energy.  Getty Copper Corp., Information Pamphlet Cominco Ltd. "Highland Valley Copper", http://cominco.com/explore/highland.html. (14-Sep-98) "HVC mini fact sheet", internal publication (1998)  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  80  Electricity costs alone amounted to $36 million, making HVC BC Hydro's third largest customer. 5.2.3 Maintenance A great deal of emphasis is placed on maintenance at HVC. An organized and intensive preventative maintenance program has allowed shovel availability of 96% to be attained (excluding the PM downtime). Each shovel undergoes a 12-hour maintenance check every week. 90  5.2.4 Environment Tailings disposal is conducted on the valley floor, northwest of the Valley pit. Two tailings dams were erected, sealing the valley along a length of approximately 10 km. The water is in a closed system with a flow rate of 153,000 liters per minute. 5.2.5 Human Resources The mine employs approximately 1,050 people. Employees have a cost-reduction bonus pay scheme where employees get a bonus in their paychecks tied to reductions in operating costs. There is also a profit-sharing scheme that is based on copper price. HVC is engaged in a recognized safety program and had won the award for being the safest large mine in BC several times. 5.2.6 Ownership & Hierarchy Several different companies are partners in the mine. The following table is a breakdown of the ownership. Table 5-1: Percent Ownership of H V C  Company  Percent  Ownership  Cominco Rio Algom Lim. Teck Corp. Highmont mining  total  50 33.6 13.9 2.5 100  The mine hierarchy is presented in the diagram below. For AFEs of lower than $CAN150000, the mine manager has the ability to accept or reject proposals. The HVC management committee must make the decision for capital purchases above this value. The committee is made up of 3 people from Cominco and Rio Algom, for a total of 6, who are  Amon, Frank. HVC mine budget, 1998, internal document  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  81  effectively the HVC directors . Therefore, this committee could be the focus of study once the advanced justification schemes had been applied to the CAES AFE, which is above the $150 000 threshold. Management Committee Dave Johnston President/GM • VP Marketing  !  Manager Milling  Bob Caines Manager Mining  jTx Supt. Mine Operations | \~ Supt. Drill and Blast ! • 1  i j ' i  Personnel Manager  Frank Amon Supt Mine Eng  Mark Richards Sen. Mine Eng.  ' ,L-  ! [  I Administration Manaqer 1  2 x Supt Mine Maint  J  ]  RalfKintzi \ - y a Sen.M.neEnggp :  ! >  Peter W,t. Mine Eng. Long Term Planner  Grant Piwek ^ Mine Eng Short Term Planner  Colin Murray i Mine Systems Specialist \f  Nelson Holowachuk Sen. Geologist Ore Quality  Sean Daly Geologist Slope Stability  1j  Dave Ayres Mine Eng. Reclamation  |— j  -  Dwight Book Eng Field Control Lome Bond Sen Geologist  Figure 5-2: H V C Management Hierarchy  5.3  Case Study 1: AQUILA  Drill Technology  & Fragmentation  Optimization  The initial research proposal was to study the financial and qualitative benefits of the GPS based AQUILA technology at HVC. During the summer data collection period, the case study was a post justification exercise of the AQUILA drill technology. The HVC engineering staff considered fragmentation optimization as being the most important aspect of the drill technology. This aspect was also considered to be one of the most challenging to justify financially. Before the results from the study are presented, background information must be provided so that the reader is familiar with the key variables that affect and were affected by the technology. This section begins by describing the AQUILA technology in detail. The blast planning, drilling and resulting fragmentation before and after technology implementation will also be described in this section. The technology was justified in this case study using Richards, Mark "Hierarchy" personal email (October 8, 1998) Richards, Mark. Ibid, (October 8, 1998)  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  82  both level 1 and level 2 justification schemes. Finally, the reasoning for classifying this technology as level 2 will conclude this section. 5.3.1  AQUILA technology  AQUILA Mining Systems Limited is a Montreal-based company, with a controlling interest owned by Caterpillar Inc. AQUILA Mining Systems Limited, Caterpillar Inc., Mincom and Trimble Navigation have formed a strategic alliance to develop and market GPS and software tools for the mining industry. AQUILA pioneered the development of advanced computer based monitoring, control and guidance systems for drills and cable shovels . AQUILA had two main product lines, a drill monitoring, control and GPS based guidance systems and a shovel and GPS-based guidance system up until 1998, it now focuses solely on drill systems. Both technologies use an Advanced Monitoring Platform (AMP). The AMP is a 32-bit computer system, which consist of a display, hand-held terminal and an electronic card housing. Two GPS receivers are required on the equipment. The receivers can be seen on the top of the mast of the drill in the diagram below. 93  Figure 5-3: 49R Drill rig showing GPS receivers  AQUILA's drill monitoring (DM) product line is for surface rotary blasthole drills. The product line consists of five different products. Not all AQUILA DM products are used at HVC. Only the products currently in use by the mine will be explained in detail. The AQUILA; Paving the way for total mining systems, promotional pamphlet, 1997  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  83  production monitoring system (DM-1) mainly consists of an operator interface, which provides the operator with immediate feedback on drill performance. The DM-2 Material Recognition system uses vibration sensors and pattern recognition algorithms to determine characteristics of the material that is being drilled. The technology can determine a hardness index and geological interface locations all in real time. This information is stored on files, which can then be uploaded into a laptop from the drill computer then downloaded into the mine LAN at the engineering office. An example, seen below, of the VGA screen seen by the operator, shows the progress of the drill bit as drilling progresses. From the left-hand side of the screen, it can be seen that the bit is 5.883 meters deep (from the collar) and the design depth is 15.45 meters. The next twofiguresshow the process of uploading the data to a laptop on the drill (note: the drill is still in operation) and downloading the files into a computer. Thefiletransfer process takes no longer than a few minutes (via serial link). DRILL - F r i Feb 28 18:38:41 1997  6.401  TRQ UIB  rorr  HIR  3.0 1 5  ^  RPM MANUAL HOIST  Metric  DEFAULT  6.401 6.401 147.2 Footage  BIT  Stop Main ( 4  ROP Fault  1.0 2.0  Ri"  UJOB r  0.0  Ipl  Setups  4.0 5.0 6.380  7.0 8.0 9.0 -10.0 )  Figure 5-4: Screen Shot - Operator's Status Screen  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  84  Figure 5-5: Uploading and downloading drill data in the drill cab (left) and in the mine engineering office (right)  The DM-3 drill control technology is used in conjunction with a programmable logic controller (PLC) and electro-hydraulic actuators to allow automatic drilling. This allows the hole to be drilled without operator control to ensure the hole is drilled from collar to design depth. The drill control system ensures that the pulldown pressure and rotary speed are within limits for torque and vibration rates. This system is not used at HVC A DM-4 maintenance monitoring system is commercially available but is not being used at HVC. The DM-5 Guidance system is the primary feature of the Trimble GPS system. Using highresolution, kinematic GPS receivers and an AMP platform, the system provides the three dimensional location of the drill in real-time. An AQUILA Moving Map Display (MMD), located in the operator's booth on the drill, displays the designed location of the blastholes along with the icon representing the position of the drill. As the drill approaches the hole, the view is automatically zoomed, allowing the operator a closer perspective of the hole position and approaching bit position. The operator can navigate throughout the drill pattern without stakes or surveying and with much greater accuracy than is possible with conventional line of sight navigation. Collar elevation is also taken into account so that the hole is always drilled to the designed depth. Figure 5-6 is a screen capture of the operator's navigation screen.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  T_M0UINGCN0_EXCEPT10N) -  85  I h u Sep 2 5 1 5 : 3 7 : 3 5 1 9 9 7 Position  far Patm:| East  |  HAL  14963.59]  Depth j  10.881  Dist  B.BBB"  1  I n s t r u c t ions NONE.  :  Heading : |291 ' Zoom : I B B x I B B  Figure 5-6: Drill Navigation Screen  The AQUILA system can provide instructions to the operator relating to a specific hole. For example, if a certain blasthole requires a sample to be taken, a message attached to the particular hole is given. The operator then places a sample bag with a barcode that contains the specific location and number of the hole in the code. This facilitates the assay lab's activities when testing the sample. 5.3.2  Blasting Methodology Pre-Technological Improvement  Before the AQUILA technology was added to the drills, two teams of up to three surveyors would have to design, stake and survey the drill pattern on-site. The general procedure was undertaken as described below . Problems faced in these situations will be explained where details are needed. 94  1. A general area is outlined by the daily planner as to where the next blast should be located. The burden and spacing is set for certain areas within the pit so that the survey team knows, before venturing into the field, what the approximate burden and spacing should be. Hence, engineering considerations such as vibration or blast optimization were limited when using this method of blast design. 2. A team of two surveyors proceeds to the area. Once on site, the blast pattern is conceived, from the on-site characteristics in the field. Exact field conditions are Description of procedure received in month of JulyfromKen Anderson, Mine technician currently in charge of blast design, former surveyor of blast patterns.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  86  frequently unknown in the engineering office. Furthermore, obstructions may impose limitations upon the design or implementation of the design. 3. The blast pattern is laid out using a Total-Station, colored tape, stakes and spray paint. A large amount of survey consumables are used to delineate the pattern. 4. Climatic conditions and adverse weather affects impede the design and implementation. Weather can also blow down the stakes, wash out the paint marks or drop snow over the pattern. 5. Location of the trim holes varies, depending on the survey team. Therefore there is little consistency in design. 6. Laying out three patterns whose blasts result in 400 000 tons of broken rock requires 16 hours. A single pattern required eleven man-hours of labor. 7. The drill operator requires great skill in positioning the drill bit over the indicated hole. The operator aims the drill rig according to azimuth lines laid out by the surveyors. A small 2x1-foot window on the floor of the rig reveals to the operator the position of the bit. 8. Occasionally, the pattern is not completed in time and during the drilling process, the stakes are commonly knocked down. Consequently, there are situations where the operator is required to line-up the drill visually, according to stakes on the periphery of the pattern. 9. Once the holes are completed, a survey team returns to the site to re-survey the drilled blasthole locations. The law requires this so that in the event of a misfire, the exact position of the misfire is known. 10. Occasionally, a 'split' is required due to time constraints in the pit. A 'split' is when a large blast pattern is divided into two blasts. A split is implemented if the shovel would run out of muck before the large blast could be drilled and blasted. In this situation, the surveying and marking of the blast pattern would be remade to suit the requirements of the pit. This effectively forces the surveyors to remark the same bench twice. Resulting Performance: In some instances, the drill rig deviates from the drill pattern by over a meter. Furthermore, the lack of precision of the drill rig is compounded by the poor accuracy of the surveyormarked pattern. The misalignment of the blast holes induces poor fragmentation: very large blocks are present within the muck pile. Engineering staff consider these large boulders a cause of increased wear on shovels, trucks, and crushers. It was also observed that poor  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  87  fragmentation would also adversely affect the mill performance. Throughput would fluctuate resulting in decreased recovery.  5.3.3 Chronology of Technology Acquisition In 1995, HVC purchased a Bucyrus Erie 49R-drill rig to begin replacing its aging 45 R drills. The 49R drill was in operation by July 1995. A second 49 R was purchased and operating by June 1996. In the AFE for the second drill, the senior mine engineer added the price of the AQUILA technology to the overall price. The comparatively small price of $US100 000 was less than 5% of the purchase price of the drill. The AQUILA technology was installed and implemented by May 1997. Results from the technology and the observed drill performance persuaded management to purchase an AQUILA system for thefirst49R drill. An AFE was submitted for approval before the AQUILA system could be purchased. Primary economic and qualitative benefits were listed. Financial statistics were calculated such as a 2 year payback and an IRR of 75.1%. A comparison of predicted financial statistics and actual financial statistics will be provided in the next chapter. A third 49R was purchased with the AQUILA system, which was installed when the drill was being built (seen completed on Figure 5-3: 49R Drill rig showing GPS receivers). Throughout this process, the old 45R drills were being retired as fast as the mine plan could afford. Currently, a single operational 45R drill is kept on site in the event of catastrophic failure of a 49R drill . Generally, two drills work in the Valley pit while the remaining drill operates in the Lornex pit. 95  5.3.4 Changes Anticipated The following two lists represent the analytical andfinancialbenefits that were anticipated based on the AFE (mentioned previously, in 5.3.3: Chronology of Technology Acquisition). 96  5.3.4.1 Anticipated Analytical benefits  The words in the square brackets will be used in a comparative table (benefits anticipated vs. achieved) presented in the next chapter: 1. The ability to drill patterns more accurately both by position and depth. Thus, drill operators will be more accountable for deviating from the drill plan as a result of quicker hole pickups, [accuracy] & [operator accountability]  Richards, Mark, "information requests" personal email, (October 27, 1998) Mark Richards, "GPS drill Technology Acquisition- AFE", internal Highland Valley Copper Report  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  88  2. An accurate collar elevation is obtained from each hole and the hole depth can be adjusted, producing more even benches resulting in improved operating conditions for shovels and trucks, [more even benches] 3. Explosive strength can be adjusted according to the measured drillability, thus improving explosives consumption and fragmentation. Optimizing fragmentation will improve diggabilty, reducing wear on the shovels, trucks and crushers while improving mill throughput, [less explosives consumption] & [better fragmentation] 4. Drill navigation is an essential step towards single operator-multiple drill operations and automation, [automation option] 5. Automated drill hole surveying and material recognition will provide information for blast design and provide opportunity for a more automated and productive explosives loading system, [material recognition] & [improved explosives loading] 5.3.4.2 Anticipated Financial benefits  The following financial benefits were calculated for the A.F.E. 1. discounted payback period of 1.3 years 2. IRR of 75.1% 3. projected annual operating savings of $146,000 4. 0.01% improvement in throughput ($30,000/yr. at 90 eVlb.) 5. Reduced shovel costs of $30,708/yr. 6. Reduced drill & blast costs of $104,470/yr. 7. A reduction in survey overtime for pattern staking and hole pickups 8. A reduction in the consumption of survey materials The above analytical and financial benefits will be used in a comparison with the actual results achieved. Discussion and application of the various justification schemes, are the subjects of the next chapter. 5.3.5 Reasoning Behind Level 2 Classification. A method of classifying technologies into three levels is used, as discussed in chapter 3, as a means of determining which justification schemes are appropriate. Classification mainly depends on the level of integration into the overall system. The AQUILA technology is heavily integrated into the drill operation and blast pattern design of the mine; however, it  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  89  does not directly influence planning, scheduling or any other department in the mine. The technology has radically changed a certain component of the process, namely the design and implementation of blast design. This process can be considered a 'cell' of the overall system; this integration on a cell basis corresponds to a level 2 technology. Therefore a more intense economic analysis is required, coupled with portfolio analysis. These justification schemes will be presented in the following chapter. 5.4  Case Study 2: CAES technology  & Ore Blending  This case study was initiated out of the requirement to provide a field example of level 3 CIA methods. During the summer study, the mine-engineering department was attempting to justify, mainly in basic financial terms (level 1-justification schemes), a technology that was clearly level 3. This presented an opportunity to apply a level 3 justification scheme in a practical example. The technology was to be used as intended by the designers, Caterpillar, but also for a larger purpose, as a blending tool. The most important financial benefit was difficult to justify because the technology would be integrated, with a series of other new technologies, into both mine and mill to create a comprehensive ore-tracking tool. This tool would be used to optimize ore blending to the mill. (Initial estimates of the return on such a project was approximately $12 million/year). The complexity, risk and integrated nature of this ore blending project would generate the need for level 3 justification schemes to provide a realistic forecast of the benefits. The next chapter describes the application of Level 3 justification schemes to this project. This section provides the background information required. This subsection begins by providing a description of CAES technology. The ore-blending project developed following a series of experiences at HVC. The chronology and details of these experiences are discussed. The current system in place at HVC will be described so that the reader is familiar with the variables and constraints affecting the project. Finally, a description of the ore blending project is provided. 5.4.1 C A E S Technology CAES is based on GPS technology, software and digital wireless communication. The basic components include a digital bi-directional radio, on-board 486 computer and software. CAES is part of a series of products called Mining and Earthmoving Technology Systems (METS). These products were developed by Caterpillar Inc. and its partners; AQUILA Mining Systems Limited, Trimble Navigation Limited, and Mincom to supply a perceived demand for systems that use new technologies to improve operations efficiency . 97  Caterpillar - "CAES", Promotional paper submitted to HVC by Finning Inc. Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  90  A mine plan, based on any planning software, is exported into a software package called METSmanager, in AutoCAD format (DXF) (there is a series of software offered that help in planning & design called METSoffice). The plan is transmitted to the machine via digital radio link using simple 'drag and drop' procedures typical for Windows-based programs. The on board system is known as CAES. The design can be instructions for a shovel, loader, grader or dozer. RTK GPS technology provides the position and orientation of the vehicle to the operator so that he can see his position with respect to the mine plan and pertinent geological features. Figure 5-7 shows the view that a front-end loader operator has on the CAES screen. The view allows the operator to load specific volumes of ore (in the case of a shovel or loader), cut and fill an area precisely to design (dozer, shovel or loader) or sculpt roads to design specifications (grader). CAES transmits estimated changes in the real-world situation incurred by the vehicle's earthmoving activities (it updates the topographical maps), to close the loop between planning and production.  i 2  t  i.  _  r  s  i  Figure 5-7: Front-end loader operator's view of the CAES screen  There are many possible benefits quoted for this system. The following list enumerates these benefits and explains the reasoning behind them . 98  1. Information 1  Real-time radio link between planning and operations can provide • Timely topography & pit face status Faster reaction time to pit events Faster plan updates Improved quality and speed in production statistics  ,8  information received from photocopy of slides received by HVC from Finning during sales presentation  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  91  • Improved blending at the face Better documentation via METS Office can provide the following advantages: • Production tracking by ore grade • Improved reconciliation, in the mine and mill relationship • Royalty tracking • Reduced record-keeping inconsistencies from reduced transcribing 3 Cost elimination 2  4  • Many survey costs eliminated (CAES can update the plans automatically • Partial elimination of fly-overs Increased precision/visual awareness  • Timely, virtual markers for ore contacts • Bench elevation control • Poor visibility environments no longer a detriment 5 Ore Control Systems • Elimination of erroneous ore routing following loading • Reduced dilution • Improved stockpile blending 6 Sloping applications • • • •  Ramps/roads Leach pad construction Pre-stripping Reclaim contouring  The above list is an example of the type of advantages possible using this type of technology. The list is comprised mostly of qualitative benefits that are difficult to quantify in economic terms. Caterpillar representatives, in a sales presentation to HVC, calculated the economic advantage of eliminating erroneous ore routing. Using a case study at another copper mine, it was determined that 7% of truckloads were sent to the incorrect destination. For example, a truck loaded with ore went to the waste dump while a truck loaded with waste was dumped into the crusher. It was calculated that with a 240 Ton truck and an ore grade of .5% Cu, a truckload of misidentified ore would cost a mine 30000 $/day. To the author's knowledge, this is the only formal justification of this technology. Other advantages such as facilitated leach pad construction or better documentation are difficult to justify using conventional justification techniques. It is important to note that more uses will became apparent as other operations consider and implement the technology. Improved stockpile blending is considered to be an advantage of this system; however, the HVC implementation plan to accomplish this difficult task has not yet been devised. The mill and mine planners at HVC have proposed a project that would use a combination of blending at the face, on the conveyors and on the stockpile to achieve a  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  92  desired grade, hardness and fragmentation distribution. This would involve both mine and mill. This project would use the ore tracking abilities of CAES and conveyor and mill modeling and monitoring to track ore throughout the entire system. The details of this project will be discussed in the following subsection. Despite the many other benefits obtained when using CAES, blending will be the only qualitative benefit justified in this thesis and will be used as an example of level 3 justification. In order to determine the true value of this technology, all the uses for the technology, to be used in the particular operation, should be ascertained. 5.4.2 Chronology In early 1996 , the mine engineering department planned to increase efficiency and decrease costs by increasing their drill bit size and thereby the required burden and spacing. This induced a fragmentation distribution with much larger fragments . As predicted, mining costs were reduced, however, mill throughput greatly decreased. Savings incurred in the mine were greatly offset by the increased maintenance costs and decreased copper concentrate production from the mill. These experiences revealed to the mine and mill planners the importance of fragmentation to the overall profitability of the company. Planning procedures were changed at HVC to reflect a more cooperative rapport between the mine and mill planners. Currently, staff from the mill go to the weekly mine planning meetings and mine engineering staff go to biweekly ore quality meetings at the mill. 99  100  The revelation of the importance of fragmentation prompted mine management to hire a consultant, JKMRC of Australia, to devise a methodology to determine; 1. The optimum fragmentation for the mill; 2. An empirical formula to determine fragmentation during blast design phase. The study is considered proprietary information of the mine therefore the details will not be discussed herein. One of the main conclusions derived from the report is that ore hardness is not one of the main structural variables influencing fragmentation, as previously thought. The rock quality designation RQD, or the frequency and number of joints was considered to be the most influential variable on blastability. Size distribution (whose result is a variable of blast design) and hardness were determined to be the most influential variables governing mill throughput. This study prompted a suggestion, from the Senior Control Metallurgist, to improve the current system of fragmentation forecasting and blending. Richards, Mark, Ibid (October 27 Derived from discussion with Frank Amon, Engineering superintendent and Mark Richards, senior mine engineer, during summer visit in 1998. 9 9  th)  1 0 0  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  93  5.4.3 Current System  Currently, and in the past, HVC has been estimating ore hardness, for the purposes of blast design and throughput forecasting using knowledge of the geological conditions combined with personal experience and intuition. A 'Nelson Number', also known as ' A line equivalent hardness number', is used to classify different regions within the pit. The number is an indexed figure based on the experience of the Senior Geologist in charge of ore quality, Nelson Holowachuk. The index number is known as A-line equivalent because the index is based on the throughput of the A line semi-autogenous (SAG) mill, a 10 m diameter SAG with a standard ball charge . 101  Figure 5-8: Grinding at H V C  1 0 2  The HVC mill has five separate grinding lines labeled A through E (as seen in Figure 5-8: Grinding at HVC). These are fed by three storage piles, labeled pile 1 through 3. They can be seen in Figure 5-10. In the overhead photo, the mill can be seen in the north east quadrant. Three conveyor belts can be seen conveying the ore onto the piles. It can also be seen that there are inactive portions of the piles. These are the outer truncated cones seen most clearly on coarse pile 3 (left most pile). The ore is drawn into the mill through underground feeders. If the piles are reduced to 30% of their capacity, the outer cones begin to be drawn into the Simkus, Ron and Dance, Adrian., Tracking Hardness and Size: Measuring and Monitoring ROM Ore Properties at Highland Valley Copper., Mine to Mill - 98, paper Submitted for AIMM conference, Brisbane, 1998 Highland Valley Copper, "A world Class Mine"., Corporate Mission Statement, p. 15 102  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  94  mill. The outer cones are typically more coarse since large fragments tend to ravel down the active cone.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  96  Figure 5-10: Coarse Ore Storage Piles  A network of conveyors feeds the piles. The network can be seen in the Figure 5-9. From 'Figure 5-9: Conveyor Belt Flowsheet', it can be seen that the 2-1 conveyor, leading from the Lornex pit, can be combined with the feed coming from the surge pile on conveyor L2A. Conveyors LI A and LIB, attached to crushers 4 and 5 respectively, feed the surge pile. Conveyor L2B also draws from the surge pile and can be blended with conveyor L2A feed, to supply pile 3 or with feed from the Lornex pit to supply pile 1.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  97  Figure 5-11: Surge Pile  Figure 5-11 shows the surge pile which is fed from the L 1 A conveyor and LIB conveyor, however, the feeds can remain segregated if the feeder rates beneath the surge pile are similar. The diagram and table below provides a schematic of the possible blends. These diagrams reflect the assumption that the ore on the surge pile remains segregated. Table 5-2: Material Flow Origin Lx Crusher 4 Crusher 5  Destination / Pile 1 or 2 2 and/or 3 1 and/or 3  [LTL_-—HPile 1|  \C5Y-  -ftPile 3 |  Figure 5-12: Material Flow  This method of blending has been successful in the past, however, it depends highly on the senior geologist's experience. A more scientific and automated methodology, currently under consideration at HVC, will be presented in the next section.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  98  5.4.4 Optimization of Ore Blending Using various technologies used in mills and available for mining equipment, it may be possible to track ore properties through the entire system . Some studies or interpolations of certain key aspects must also be ascertained, such as the blending behavior of the surge pile, crusher and storage piles. The general plan and assumptions have been interpreted as follows. 103  Ore hardness, grade and other properties for a particular volume of ore can be determined through geological databases or from drill data logs that are automatically created from AQUILA drill monitoring systems. Figure 5-12 provides an example of the hardness contours.  Figure 5-13: Hardness Contours  Spatial polygons could be interpreted so that following a blast, the ore properties and mechanical properties for every volume of the blasted muck would be known. Using the CAES technology the ore could be tracked from the bench to a crusher. This technology has made the project possible since most of the other technologies and infrastructure needed for the project, have been available and implemented at HVC. Once the ore has been dumped into one of the two in-pit gyratory crushers, it can be tracked through the system using the existing monitoring system. Figure 5-14 graphically represents the information viewed by the mill monitoring system. The crusher CR1 represents the crusher that services the Lornex pit and CR4 & 5 represent the two crushers in the Valley pit. Blending occurs in the crushers. Each crusher has two dumping bays so that two trucks can dump simultaneously as seen in Figure 5-15. Ron, Simkus et. al. Ibid., p.3  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  99  Trucks dump onto an apron feeder that has a capacity of approximately 500 tons, equivalent to approximately 3 truck loads (for standard 172 ton Cat haul trucks). Three truckloads are blended together in the crusher, making it possible to control the blend of the ore through dispatch. 30.0 hi rd  No. CR1 - Lornex  38.0 hard  1  feeder  I...  F2:  1290tph  No. 1 P i l *  23,644 XontiQS]  L 2 D  F  168+tph  ~g* in crease for # 1 pile  L  decrease for #2 pile  38.0 hard  \ ;  +0.0 hard  CR4-Valley  L4 2778 tph  +5.0 ha rd 50.0 ha rd  T5~ 2776 tph CRS - Valley  rock box  J5£hard_  A •s  16+3tph 23 V.  feeder  surge\  •  L 2 A  T*1  rn  L3 (2-2)  32 V. feeder  No. 2 Pil* 25*746  tonnes  +3.0 hard  L3 lor #2 pile 2C for #3 pile  A & B  m  1383tph | feeder  T2B—m  F1B:  -  2 - 2  21+3tph  § 2 C  +5.0 hard 2286 tph  +1.5 hard  1726tph J  E3  17 V.  F3:  increase for#1 pile decrease for #3 pile  +5.0 hard 2C  No.  A  J  Pil e  75,779 t5,T79  *o«fles  1331tph  13+2tph  Figure 5-14: Monitoring screen of muck flow from pit to pile, H V C 104  Figure 5-15: Gyratory, semi-mobile, in-pit crusher at H V C  Figure 5-14 shows that crushers 4 and 5 feed the same surge pile. Ore remains segregated as long as the feeder rate of feeders F1A and FIB remain the same. Dance, Adrian "pictures" personal email (July 15 , 1998) th  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  100  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  The senior control metallurgist developed a stockpile model, Figure 5-16. As ore falls upon the pile, blending occurs. According to the model, virtual 'slabs' of approximately 1500 tons (depending on the capacity of the pile) are blended together. Two virtually separate cones, containing several 'slabs' of ore are fed onto the conveyor belts leading to the storage piles as long as the feeder rates drawing from the piles are the same and the feed onto the two piles is the same. When the feeder rates of the feeders vary, blending between the two cones can occur. The algorithm below determines the resulting blend. top of pile: crushed material is added to this slice  slices shuffled up/down as pile ^shrinks/grows j  each slice:  1. total tonnes  2. hardness 3. * Cu (track)  tow pile conditions: may require some mixing of slices and bypass  bottom of pile: the grade & hardness of this slice is sent to grinding  Figure 5-16: Surge Pile Diagram  If Pl<50% of the total tons of the surge pile  'PlYF2^  WT= — lP2  Fl  where 0.1<P1/P2<1 .5<F2/F1<1  and  If Pl<20% of the total tons of the surge pile  If Pl>==50% of total tons of surge pi e  WT =  WT =  r  P  l  P2  Y  F  2  Fl  '  where 0.1<P1/P2<1 .8<F2/F1<1  and  where 0.5<F2/F1<1  Where: PI = above the feeder P2 = above the opposing feeder Fl = feed rate of the feeder of the pile Fl= feed rate of the feeder of the opposite pile WT= the fraction of the feed not blended into other feeder Figure 5-17: Surge Pile Blending Algorithm  The blending algorithm has yet to be validated. A physical model of blending will allow the mine to manipulate the blend using the surge pile feeders.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  101  From the surge pile, the ore continues to the storage piles 1-3. The mill has the ability to blend on the conveyor by increasing the feed rate on the various feeders or by using a rock box. On Figure 5-9, it can be seen that feed from the Lornex pit can be directed to pile 1 by increasing the feed rate, or to pile 2 by decreasing the feed rate. Therefore controlled blending is possible at these junctions. Further blending occurs once the ore lands on the storage piles, similar to the blending that occurs on the surge pile. Slabs of 1500 tons are blended, producing virtually homogeneous volumes of ore. As discussed previously, if the active cones are reduced in volume to 30% of their capacity, the inactive section of the cone begins to feed into the mill. The inactive sections of the storage piles are usually more coarse than the average feed, because larger rocks tend to roll down the pile to the outside. Table 5-3 summarizes these blending methods and describes their degree of control. Table 5-3: Blending Summary  Area  Blending control  (high degree of control) Pre-crusher (face blending) • Truck dispatch  Crusher Surge Pile  Conveyor blending  Storage Piles  •  Drill data database  •  Optimization algorithm  • Wireless radio-link-LAN (No control)  Constraints/variables •  Production  •  Properties of blasted ore  •  Preventative maintenance (PM) on shovels  •  Feed from trucks  (Semi-control)  •  PM - shovels  •  •  PM - crushers  Variable feed rates of draws  •  Surge pile capacity  (high degree of control)  •  PM - conveyors  •  •  PM - feeders  •  PM-mill  •  Storage pile capacity  feeder rates  (No control)  •  PM-mill  •  Storage pile capacity  5.4.5 Associated Technologies Whipfrag™, a product that uses imaging technology, can determine the size distribution of ore moving along the conveyor belt. The product consists of a digital camera that takes a picture of ore moving by on a conveyor belt (as seen in the Figure 5-18) or in a shovel bucket. HVC is in the process of installing 9 Whipfrag cameras, placed at strategic locations throughout the are handling system.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  102  Once an image is captured, Whipfrag software delineates the ore into various size fragments as seen in the figure below. The fragments are counted and their size analyzed. A particle size distribution can be provided. The most common problems encountered are the virtual fusion of fine particles into larger fragments and the virtual disintegration of large particles into smaller fragments. HVC currently records the distribution of the particles in three categories; fine, medium and coarse, as seen in Figure 5-19. A single Whipfrag camera can sample the ore on the conveyor belts four times per minute . 105  Figure 5-18: A) Whipfrag image capture  B) Whipfrag Delineation  (+125mm)  Figure 5-19: Whipfrag results  Fragmentation monitoring technology, such as Whipfrag, can be used to optimize mining systems since blast design models can then be tested for accuracy. For example, HVC received a blasting design model from JKMRC, based on empirical data. The model predicts Dance, Adrian. From conversations during July visit  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  103  fragmentation based on rock properties and blast design. The senior metallurgist confirmed the results of the JKMRC results using Whipfrag and developed his own model that can anticipate the effect of the fragmentation on the SAG mill throughput. Attempts were made to determine the accuracy of the model using Whipfrag. Figure 5-20 compares the predicted and actual values of the throughput versus time. From the accuracy of this model, it was deduced that optimum blending design is possible using modeling.  Figure 5-20: Actual vs. Predicted throughput over time  5.4.6  Financial Reasoning for CAES/Blending project  Considering the low grade of the HVC ore and size of the mill, throughput is an important process variable for the mine. The SAG mill is considered by some as the bottleneck of the entire mine-mill system. The purpose of the blending project is to devise an automated methodology of blending the ore so that throughput will be relatively constant. Fewer power spikes and less maintenance are minor cost savings that may be derived from a constant throughput.' The major motivation from this project is the increased recovery that would be derived from a constant throughput. 06  The advantage of automatic blending comes from basic mineral processing theory. The major economic benefit from blending the ore is the decrease in the variability of the throughput in the SAG mill. Constant throughput increases recovery. Recovery is defined as (in the case of metallic ores), "the percentage of the total metal contained in the ore that is  Richards, Mark, Ibid, (October 27 , 1998) th  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  104  recovered in the concentrate" , see Figure 5-21. According to mineral process theory and practice, recovery increases with residence/retention time. However, due to economic constraints, the feed cannot stay in the flotation circuit for the amount of time it takes to approach 100% recovery. Consumables such as energy for the system components and chemicals needed for flotation must be balanced economically. There is an optimal overall retention time (time period that the mineral remains in the system). The SAG mill governs the retention time of the system at HVC . For example, if fine, soft ore enters the SAG mill, the ore passes through the mill quickly. Throughput thus can greatly increase whilst the retention time decreases. Recovery will decrease if the time spent in the system decreases. 1U/  108  Comparatively, if very coarse, hard ore suddenly enters the system, throughput decreases, which increases the retention time of the ground mineral, but not consuming the designed amount of chemicals and energy. In this case, too much effort (hence money) is expended to obtain the metal. A controllable throughput allows the optimal retention time to be achieved.  Tirn* Figure 5-21: Recovery vs. time  The estimated increase in recovery at HVC is currently estimated to be equivalent to 12 million pounds of copper per year. 110  5.4.7 Blending Summary This project requires level 3 justification schemes due to the deep integration of the technology within the mining system and the large degree of risk. The calculated economic benefits would be greatly underestimated due to the high hurdle rate normally used for such a high risk application. Simulation of the system can be used to demonstrate that the system 107 108 1 0 9  110  Wills, Barry A., Mineral Processing Technology, 5 ed., Pergamon Press, 1992, p.31 Dance, Adrian from personal conversation during September visit Wills, Ibid p.539 Dance, Adrianfrompersonal conversation during September visit.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  th  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 5 - Background to Practical Examples  105  will be capable of decreasing the variability of the mill feed. Such a demonstration would provide justification for decreasing the hurdle rate. A simulation of the system for this purpose is presented in the following chapter. The proposed blending project integrates several technologies and a large flow of information that will span the entire mine. More importantly, a fundamental change of the way the mine operates will be required if the project is to be successful. More communication between the mine and mill, an open collective outlook of the workforce, and managerial commitment are needed. As mentioned previously, communication between the mill and mine has greatly expanded since the realization that the characteristics of the mine feed has such a direct effect on the performance of the mill and hence, overall profitability. The workforce at HVC has demonstrated that technological change is possible through its acceptance of highly technical innovations, such as the use of GIS and drill monitoring. Managerial support will have to be won through appropriate justification of the project, which is the focus of the next chapter.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  106  Practical E x a m p l e s of the Justification S c h e m e s  6  This chapter presents the application of new CIA methods to the two case studies described in the previous chapter. The examples will be presented in increasing complexity; the AQUILA drill technology, followed by the blending project. 6.1  Case Study 1: AQUILA  Drill Technology  & Fragmentation  Optimization  This section presents a practical example of the proper application of level 1 and 2 CIA methods for a level 2 technology. The first sub-section presents the current state of the AQUILA technology at HVC in terms of its relation to planning, surveying, maintenance and blast design. The second sub-section presents the financial and qualitative benefits derived from using the AQUILA technology in that particular configuration. Comparisons are made between the anticipated and actual benefits and costs. This is followed by an analysis of how the original justification of the technology was performed. Finally, non-economic CIA methods that are applicable to this situation are presented. 6.1.1  Current Blasting Methodology  The current blasting methodology at HVC are described in three main steps: preliminary surveying, blast design and plan execution. 6.1.1.1 Preliminary Surveying  Conventional surveying of the area to be blasted is performed prior to design using a highly accurate GPS surveying instrument (the instrument is used as the main surveying instrument of the mine). A single surveyor performs a toe and crest pick-up to ensure that the plans in the computers have accurately delineated the position of the crest and width of the bench to be blasted. Once the mine plans have been updated (all mine plans are computerized, and are available on the mine-wide LAN), the blast design phase begins. (Preliminary surveying and data entry require approximately 2 hours.) 6.1.1.2 Blast Design  One mine technician designs the blast pattern using a planning and CAD software package called MicroStation from Bentley (Gemcom is used as the general mine design software while MicroStation is used for CAD, GIS and the production of maps'"). The technician begins by summoning a plan view of the updated bench plan. The long-term bench plan (the position of the next bench crest) is also brought into view with the locations of the bootlegs from the blast that uncovered the present bench. The software has several grids available to 111  Richards, Mark. "More information", personal email, (November 18 , 1998)  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  th  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  107  place the bench to represent the burden and spacing for regions of a certain hardness. The mine currently uses the "A line equivalent hardness" index in its blast design. The planner then repositions the holes on the periphery of the blast to ensure a clean, flat, new bench face. The tie-in is added and every hole and tie-in are numbered and labeled. Holes that require sampling are indicated. A special printer then prints out bar-code labels that are used to label the bags that the operator uses when collecting samples. Labeling simplifies the work of the lab technician, where the hole position and number are automatically recorded with the results of the lab tests, using a bar code reader. A copy of the blast plan is printed out and given to the foreman of the drill operators. Once the technician supervisor and the mine superintendent approve the plan , positions of the holes are saved in AQUILA readable data format on a laptop. Finally, the design technician drives to the drill(s) and downloads the plan into the AQUILA computer on the drill. Data stored on the AQUILA computer can be uploaded at the same time to retrieve the data provided by the various AQUILA products (geological data such as hardness that can be used in updating hardness contours or actual drilled blasthole position that is required by law to locate possible bootlegs). A technician requires 3 hours to design a plan that would produce half a million tons of broken rock. (Note: the upload/download step could be automated with a wireless communications network. This is one of the benefits that can be achieved using the CAES technology described previously.) 112  6.1.1.3 Plan Execution  The operator must determine the most efficient manner of navigating the drill to the various hole positions. The operator navigates the drill using the Moving Map Display (MMD) on board, then engages the automatic collaring and drilling mechanism once the bit is in position. The burden and spacing can vary between 6.6 x 7.6 (753 t per hole) to 13.3 x 15.3 meters (3050 t. hole). Drilling time per hole varies from 15 min to lhr 15min. The bigger patterns tend to be softer and thus quicker to drill. Engineering staff estimate that a blast that produces half a million tons takes 7 or 8 shifts. 113  6.1.2 Qualitative Benefits The final costs and benefits assembled as part of this thesis are presented in this subsection. The benefits promised in the AFE are analyzed and the benefits not anticipated are listed. The financial benefits are estimated, according to conventional, level 1 techniques for the AFE.  112 113  Richards, Mark. Ibid, (November 18 , 1998) Richards, Ibid (November 18 , 1998) th  th  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  108  6.1.2.1 Predicted Qualitative Benefits  The qualitative benefits indicated in the AFE and their outcome are presented in Table 6-1. Table 6-1: Qualitative Benefits Promised in the A F E vs. Actual Outcome  Promised  Final result  Accuracy  There has been a distinct improvement in blasthole position. Previously, both surveyors and drill operators were responsible for positioning the hole correctly. Now only the drill operator is responsible and has been given the tools to easily and accurately position the hole. Hole position went from an accuracy of ±1-2 meters to the current accuracy of ±10 cm. Drill operators can be held more accountable for deviating from the pattern. Recording the position and time for each hole is a form of constant supervision, ensuring high quality.  Drill operator accountability More level benches  Clean-up crews, the first workers to re-enter a newly blasted area, have reported an improvement on the amount of clean up required compared with the period before the technology was implemented. Furthermore, shovels have reported less hard toes while truck drivers have noticed smoother bench levels.  Less explosives There has been no distinguishable improvement in explosives consumption consumption that can be attributed to the technology. This is mainly due to the lack of resources to take advantage of all the information provided by the monitoring system. A great deal of data is recorded by the monitoring system that can be used to optimize aspects of the operation involving drilling. Improved Fragmentation affects the operation in many respects. Reportedly, shovels fragmentation require less ground engaging consumables. The mill has also reported an improvement in fragmentation, (of the many variables involved in the improvements mentioned above, fragmentation is assumed to be one of the most important). Mill throughput has increased by 7.4% in 1998. This value is considered to be qualitative since only a fraction of that increase may be attributable to improved fragmentation. Automation option  No further autonomy has been adapted to the drill. A radio link is proposed; however, due to the current price of copper, it is an unlikely purchase.  Material recognition  The material recognition software provides an index that is related to the hardness of the material being drilled. Software adjustments have been requested to take jointing and blocks into account, since according to extensive materials testing it was determined that the different 'hardness zones' are not very distinct. However, a project has been proposed to compare the hardness index results from the technology with the mine's hardness contours, to find the exact correlation.  Improved explosives loading  There has been no change in explosives loading practice due to the presence of drill monitoring technology. However, it does improve the blast pattern initiation sequence due to design consistency, and the ability to make more informed decisions (the pit foreman sometimes cannot see 'the whole picture' from the ground).  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  109  6.1.2.2 Unpredicted Benefits  The unpredicted qualitative benefits were numerous. There are two types of benefits discussed here. The first deals with potential projects, where this specific technology is only a link in a long value chain of technologies that will eventually induce an overall economic outcome. The second type of benefits listed in this section are direct qualitative benefits that have been mentioned or expressed by the respective affected individuals or departments. 6.1.2.2.1 Potential Projects: 1.  Upgrading pit hardness contours  The technical supervisor plans to update the current pit hardness contours using the hardness index, which is automatically measured by the drill monitoring technology. The potential benefit of better knowledge of the bench is to improve fragmentation through optimal pattern design. Once the exact contours are laid out, the hardness of other areas may be interpreted so that the appropriate burden and spacing or powder factor can be applied to the blast plan according to hardness. 2.  Automatic determination of local jointing  AQUILA Mining Systems claims to have the potential to detect the presence of joints through drill string monitoring. The ability to make these measurements would allow an improved prediction of the fragmentation since jointing has been identified as the most important parameter governing fragmentation . 114  3.  Tracking bit & string performance  The current method of tracking bit and string performance is rudimentary and does not have the desired detail. The current method consists of having the drill operator alert the dispatch center that the bit or string is being changed. Using the data automatically generated from the monitoring platform, it is possible to track the overall operating time of a particular drill bit, where the largest amount of penetration occurred, and other variables. Tracking bits ensures that the drill bit suppliers conform to contract specifications. 4.  Overall throughput increase at mill  The objective of the drill monitoring platform is to improve fragmentation, a precondition of improved recovery. One of the key technologies required for the ore blending project is the AQUILA drill technology. This project is described as the ore blending project in the previous chapter. The ore blending project would not be feasible without drill technology. JKMRC, confidential report prepared for HVC mine; Optimizing Fragmentation at Highland Valley Copper with respect to Mining & Processing Operations, June 1998 114  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  110  6.1.2.2.2 Unpredicted Qualitative benefits Various employees and departments noticed several unpredicted benefits. The most important are listed below. These benefits may be quantified after considerable study and analysis. 1.  Split implementation  In the event of a requirement to split the blast design, the blasting technician simply changes the design on the computer, and updates the drill computer. Previously, surveyors had to go into the field, erase the painted lines then redraw a new pattern (the second phase of the split). This also resulted in a significant rework for the surveyors and was a source of contention between the blast foreman, drill operators and surveyors. 2. More informed design The methodology of design was changed to take advantage of the drill positioning systems, which resulted in an important benefit in terms of consistency and flexibility. By having a single methodology of design, there was less confusion, more consistency and improved operations-engineering relations. Designing a blast in this manner also allowed the design to include variables that were previously unavailable, because design of the blast was done in the field instead of the engineering office, and took into account geological, hardness and future plans. 3.  Improved safety  First aid incidents have dramatically reduced since the implementation of the AQUILA Drill technology. This is due in large part to the reduced amount of survey time technicians now spend in the pit, performing hazardous or strenuous tasks such as pounding stakes (which can induce hammer accidents such as accidentally hitting one's knee) and walking around on a drilled bench in the winter (drill holes, covered with snow have caused many sprained ankles when walked upon). 4.  Operator acceptance  Operators have expressed approval of the system since "it makes the job easier". The resulting improvement in operator enjoyment of the system, due in large part to its 'video game' type qualities, may impact on productivity and a better working atmosphere. 5.  Clean-up time  Following a blast, benches must be cleaned using dozers or front-end loaders. After a shovel has finished clearing a bench of blasted muck, the floor of the bench must be leveled so that further operations upon the bench can progress. Due to the improved blast design and drill hole accuracy, clean-up time has substantially reduced. The operations foreman has  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  111  estimated a fifty percent reduction in the amount of clean-up time needed following a blast. This benefit is difficult to quantify since the same workforce is used (no direct financial benefits are accrued from less labor). Less clean up time allows the operators involved more time to improve road conditions. 6.  Less Oversize  Increased accuracy has resulted in less oversize and a substantial reduction of secondary blasting. The benefits from the two improvements above is secondary blasting costs (or less time) and less wear on the crushers. 7.  Less Blaster Time  Since blast tie-ins are designed in the engineering office, blasters no longer require the time to 'figure out the blast layout'. Caved Holes  6.1.3 Financial Benefits  The financial benefits were determined while taking several influential factors into account, primarily the chronology of events relating to: •  which drills had the technology  •  size of bit, pattern & spacing along with the resulting fragmentation  The calculations and raw data used to determine the values in this section are provided in the appendices. Some of the results are discussed below.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  112  Table 6-2: Financial Benefits - Results  Anticipated Benefits Quantitative  Predicted  Variables  Actual  $/year $10,800 $4,200  Less surveyor o/t Less surveyor materials  $33,866 $37,705  U i * » t e d  Less 'caved' holes Design time for pattern Shovel productivity Drill utilization  Comments  Benefits $48,804 cost of drilling caved holes $50,794 extra technician time $125,9361 ($/hr. value added - calculated $142,721-1 using Budget'98)  Estimate! i Benefits Mill throughput Drill & blast costs Shovel maint.  $32,000 $104,470 $30,708  $78,000  Total Tot. incl. estimated  $15,000 $162 178  $439,826 $549 826  $32,000  none directly attributable (NDA) (explosives & bits) - NDA  There are several values in the above table that require explanation. First, it should be noted that the overall precision of the estimates is higher, due to the quantification of benefits that were previously listed as qualitative. The values in the 'Estimated' category were provided by the experts of various departments, based on quantitative data and experience. Reduced shovel maintenance savings are the reduced cost of ground engaging consumables and shovel cables. 115  The benefits in the 'unanticipated' category are explained below. 1.  Caved holes  There were situations, discovered when explosives were being loaded, that some holes had 'caved'. This can occur by drilling through bad ground or by the hole not being drilled to design depth. The monitoring system allows supervisory control where the drill logs record the depth and position the hole was drilled. Therefore operators are more observant of design parameters. 2.  Design time  In the original estimates, design time was not taken into account. This value is the savings in the amount of time required to design and approve a blast plan.  3.  Overtime reduction  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  113  Occasionally, mine engineering staff were required to stay longer than the regular hours to finish implementing a blast pattern. This no longer occurs. 4.  Utilization  The amount of holes drilled per shift has dramatically improved (listed in table as 'utilization'). This is mainly due to the drill operator's ability to quickly move from one hole to another. Operator attitude has also improved resulting in increased productivity. 6.1.4  Costs & Financial Assessment  The final costs are proprietary and will not be presented here. However, financial variables such as the payback period will be presented. Benefits and costs reflect the combined values for all variables of the 3 drills and technology platforms, because calculations were made by comparing the variables before the drill monitoring technology was implemented with the variables after all drills were outfitted with the technology. The final financial evaluation variables are presented below. The calculations and H V C discounted cash flow sheets are provided in the appendices (except public versions of this thesis). Table 6-3: Final Financial Outcome  AFE  Payback Period (using DCF $) Payback Period (using Real $) I.R.R. (%) (Using Real $) R.O.I. (%) (NPV / Investment) N.P.V. @ Prescribed Rate  6.1.5  1.3 1.3 75.1 228.1 $335,310  Actual Single Unit Chronological  1.2 1.2 77.0 235.2 $341,561  Single unit Variance  1.3 1.3 44.5 246.8 $1,010,064 $  0.0 0.0 -1.9 -7.1 (6,251)  Analysis o f Results  The analysis begins by discussing the original justification conditions and the subsequent decision. This allows the reader to understand why the original technology assessment was so thorough and precise (compared to the actual outcome). The second step in the analysis considers issues raised discussed in Chapter 3. Ashford discusses the main criticisms of formal justification schemes and makes suggestions on how to alleviate some of the weaknesses of these techniques. The analysis applies these suggestions to the above situation.  from personal communication: R. Dhaliwal for maintenance, A. Dance for milling information and Steve Gapp for mine operations 115  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  114  6.1.5.1 Original Justification Circumstances  As discussed previously (Chapter 5), the senior mine engineer was able to have the first system approved by 'being included in the cost of the technology in the original price of the second 49R purchase. The performance of the technology was observed over a few months. The blast design methodology was re-evaluated and then restructured to take advantage of the many benefits observed from the technology. Engineering staff concluded that the technology was valuable and decided to purchase the same drill monitoring system for the first 49R drill. This system had to be procured using a formal AFE. The anticipated benefits were estimated with a high degree of accuracy because the system on the second 49R had shown the possible benefits. Management had also heard of the numerous qualitative benefits derived from the system and had a favorable view of the technology before the AFE had even been submitted. It is uncertain whether the mine management would have approved the purchase of a drill monitoring system and what the anticipated estimates would have been. Hurdle rates may have been applied by decision-makers in the original assessment, but a bias in favor of the technology was present due to its successful implementation in the second 49R drill. 6.1.5.2 Financial Assessment  This section describes the financial assessment that was undertaken following the implementation of the drill monitoring technology. Suggestions of information that should have been included in the original technology assessment are discussed. The postimplementation financial justification uses hard data and estimates provided by mine records and staff. This discussion focuses on the variables listed, not the values of the variables since these would be unknown if the technology had not been implemented previously (as was the case in this example). Ashford (from chapter 3) has acknowledged that the usual methods of applying traditional financial techniques are not suitable to new technologies; however, he insists that the basic axioms of the methods are sound." The next few paragraphs follow Ashford's suggestions on how to properly apply traditional financial justification techniques to the AQUILA technology. 6  6.1.5.2.1 Taking into account the long-term effects. As discussed in the literature review, traditional appraisal methods undervalue long term effects for several reasons. First, the payback method is highly criticized for its preference Ashford, R.W., R. G. Dyson and S.D. Hodges; The Capital-Investment Appraisal of New Technology: Problems, Misconception and Research Direction, Journal of Operational Research Society., Vol.37, No.7, pp.639, 1998 116  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  115  for projects which focus on short term benefits. Discounting methods also tend to undervalue the long term effect, if the discounting rate used is unrealistically high. Standard discount rates should reflect market realities, not a corporate-wide figure that has been standardized to apply to any investment proposal. Finally, Ashford condemns the widespread tendency for management to blindly apply blanket hurdle rates such as minimum payback period or ROI. HVC uses a discount rate of 10%. Corporate wide hurdle rates are also used in capital asset budgeting. A minimum payback period of two years is the norm. These managerial practices should not be overly criticized just because they are the only methods well known to mine management. Recommendations on how to change these practices are not an objective of this thesis; however, it is important to comment that management should scrutinize these methods when evaluating new technology. Recognizing the various technology levels also aids in knowing what the limits of the CIA methods are with respect to the technology under evaluation. Therefore several of the conclusions that can be derived from this step in the analysis are as follows: 1. Foster a greater undestanding by management of the difference between technologies and the limits of the CIA methods used; 2. Make management aware of other CIA methods and which technology would best apply; 3. Question the use of blanket hurdle rates; 4. Consider using a discount rate that reflects reality, avoid company-wide standard rates. 6.1.5.2.2 Assumptions about the Future Commodity markets are dynamic. Demand for mining products fluctuates. Activities within operations have many variables that govern the mine's performance. The entire mining process is dynamic, from the planning stage to the customer. For example, the assumptions made whenfirstdesigning a mine may not be applicable to the same mine after five years of operation, therefore what was considered to be the optimum operating procedures may no longer be optimal. Unfortunately, level 1 CIA methods rarely take this dynamic nature of the mining system into account. An appropriate response to the inherent weakness of these methods is to make forecasts or scenarios of the environment and incorporate this data into both the base-case and new technology appraisals. Historical data, expert opinions and personal experience can be used in these forecasts to reflect reality more accurately. For example, during the original evaluation, the increased drill utilization was unpredicted and therefore remained unquantified. Furthermore, the value of operator satisfaction was undervalued.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  116  Operators expressed enjoyment in navigating with the A Q U I L A system because it was 'like playing a video game'. Therefore operators wanted to work faster and more efficiently so that the navigation segment of the drilling cycle would happen sooner. Figure 6-1 shows drill productivity before and after the technology was implemented.  Drill productivity for the  49R.S was decreasing; however, once the technology was implemented, the productivity increased and continues to increase. The eventual production rate when stabilized will likely be much higher than prior to the technology implementation. Figure 6-1: Meters drilled per drill over the time scale  18000 X  16000  -  m  14000  A  I  s-—  12000 0  I  B  X  A  •  *  " " x~~x  x  x  •  '  10000  X  A  •  •  *  • Pre-AQUILA  A Indicisive x Post-AQUILA  8000  6000 Oct -95  Feb-96  May-96  Aug-96  Dec-96  Mar-97  Jun-97  Sep-97  Jan-98  Apr-98  Jul-98  This decreasing trend before the technological implementation could have been detected using monthly drill reports. The increased productivity o f the drill fleet could have been predicted by knowing the drilling process (the ease o f navigating onto a staked marker vs. GPS positioned virtual marker) and understanding the psychology o f the operators. A more strategic example o f making forecasts can be based on the fluctuating market values of some commodities. A production increase that occurs due to the implementation o f the technology coupled with an increase in demand (hence price) o f the commodity would greatly alter the NPV o f a project. A negative example o f disregarding future conditions could be making an evaluation during an economic boom (hence using those current values) but then witnessing when the technology is implemented that the market demand drops. There are several reasons why evaluators (including the H V C staff) currently do not include the dynamic nature o f the mining industry in justifications. The uncertainty o f making future assumptions can be challenging for the individual undertaking the evaluation because these assumption may be wrong or strongly contrary to the view of the decision maker.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  117  This problem can be avoided by presenting several scenarios and documenting evidence for the probabilities of each case, based on expert opinion or hard data. Unfortunately, decision makers commonly rely on single number comparisons (such as payback period, NPV, ROI, etc.) that are compared to the base case single value (e.g. payback period, NPV...). A second impediment for including the dynamic nature of the mining industry is time. Those individuals whose task is to evaluate the technology are commonly employees who have many other responsibilities. Researching possible scenarios and the links between the many variables that new technology tends to influence is very time consuming; furthermore, individuals who are not on-site may be unaware of several of the affected variables, and yet are responsible for the evaluation. Finally, management flexibility and the time to absorb a complex evaluation that includes several scenarios is one of the most significant impediments to using dynamic CIA methods. Corporate culture may not readily allow such evaluations. Several conclusions can be summarized from this step in the analysis: 1. Justification of new technology whose benefits may be long term or can affect dynamic trends should be valued using methods that are dynamic. This can be accomplished by researching and presenting various scenarios that are perceived to be feasible. 2. Appropriate time and resources should be devoted to evaluating technologies whose value may alter over time. 3. An individual who fully understands the system should undertake the evaluation. 4. Decision-makers should be flexible enough to evaluate a dynamic justification. 6.1.5.2.3 Benefits Ignored New technology offers many qualitative benefits that are often difficult to quantify. Financial CIA methods in particular have difficulty in taking these benefits into account. Some benefits can be estimated using hard data and expert opinion, but the individual justifying the technology must put the effort into analyzing all of the affected variables. Once the system has been defined, the system's response to the new technology must be ascertained. This may involve increased vigilance and take much longer than traditional financial justification methods. The resulting evaluation will contain many more variables and take more time with greater uncertainty. The decision-maker may not agree with the assumptions or analysis of the situation, creating a negative bias against the technology. Documented proof and direct opinions of experts who are willing to support their opinions would aid in the credibility and reliability of the justification.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  118  An example of qualitative benefits that can be assessed in quantitative terms through in-depth investigation is the cost savings incurred by altering the design methodology. The engineering department was planning to restructure the blast design methodology following the implementation of the technology; hence, design costs would also change following the restructuring. Estimates could have revealed the $51 000 dollar savings (per year) that occurred. The table below summarizes these calculations. The design production rate estimates were provided by the individual who currently (and previously) designs the patterns and the salary rates were obtained from the HVC union contract. 117  Table 6-4: Design Costs Cost of pattern implementation & design (in man-hours) hours pre-tech post-tech difference % decrease  #of patterns  16 3 13 81%  3 2 1 33% patterns/year  it of technicians  2  1 1 50%  hours/pattern/ cost/year (mantechnician hours)  10.7 1.5 9.2 86%  $59,105 $8,312 $50,794 86%  4 208  There was no reduction in staff following the technology acquisition. The surveyors that formerly undertook the design and implementation of blast patterns were placed in other profit or quality generating positions (for example, one such technician currently maintains the GIS database, which has greatly improved many other aspects of mine design). This evaluation has not quantified this benefit, as the uncertainty of such an estimate would weaken the evaluation. It should be noted that undertaking a more in-depth investigation should result in increased accuracy for those variables that are anticipated. For example, the quantitative benefit of using less surveyor materials were determined much more accurately during the second justification process than in the original AFE. The reduction in survey material produced a cost saving of $38,000, which is much higher than the original estimate of $4,200 per year. It is understandable that the original AFE did not require as much scrutiny as a technology completely new to the operation since, as discussed previously, a system had already proved itself to be worthy before the AFE was commissioned. The increased accuracy may reveal some costs that were unanticipated. From the above analysis the following conclusions can be drawn:  Ken Anderson, Mine technician, formerly part of a group of 6 field surveyors, has undertaken the design and implementation of the design patterns. 1 1 7  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  119  1. Decision-makers should maintain an open mind when evaluating the justification documents. 2. Those who undertake the justification should document the opinions and support the assumptions made with hard data and reasoning. Adequate time should be allocated to ensure the justification is accurate and complete. 3. The qualitative benefits should be quantified to the best of the evaluator's abilities. 4. The believability of the justification should be taken into account. Estimates should not be included that appear unsubstantiated. 5. The un-quantifiable costs should also be included. 6.1.5.2.4 Management Control Ashford (1988) condemned organizational reward systems that reward managers for supporting projects that yield clear short term rewards against long term profitability. This may not be a problem at HVC since the management culture is very personalized. Individuals relate to each-other on a first name basis and live in a relatively small community. Furthermore, the reward system at HVC was not included in this research for confidentiality reasons. For large projects, where the expenses are above $150,000, the decision to proceed is made by a committee that is far removed from the community and the mine. In this case, the upper management may have a short-term profitability outlook on the mine. 6.1.6 Selection of Level 2 Justification Scheme(s) The technological and justification classification of the AQUILA drill technology has been discussed previously in this thesis and it has been concluded that it is a level 2 technology. Nevertheless, not all level 2 justification schemes apply. For example, programming models are ideal for situations where a mix of technologies is being considered. Another example is growth options, where the value of a technology that would produce financial benefits only under certain conditions (dependent on an independent fluctuating variable such as price) can be evaluated. Thus programming models and growth options are not viable CIA methods for this technology since it is a single technology and it always exhibits its value. Scoring methods are appropriate for this technology, since it has many qualitative benefits that can be rated by the decision-makers. AHP was considered to be a valuable justification method. The method was presented to the person responsible for the decision regarding the AQUILA technology acquisition.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  120  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  6.1.7 Application of AHP at HVC D u r i n g t h e s e c o n d H V C v i s i t , the a n a l y t i c a l h i e r a r c h y p r o c e s s w a s e x p l a i n e d t o t h e C h i e f o f Engineering.  H e was  a s k e d t o list t h e o b j e c t i v e s  that w e r e  needed  t e c h n o l o g y w a s b e i n g c o n t e m p l a t e d . T h e r e s p o n s e s a r e l i s t e d T a b l e 6-5; a c h i e v e the o b j e c t i v e s (selected b y the e n g i n e e r ) are also listed.  at t h e t i m e t h e  drill  p o s s i b l e s o l u t i o n s to  O t h e r o b j e c t i v e s , s u c h as  s u r v e y o r safety, f r a g m e n t a t i o n , a n d b e n c h grade (level), w e r e not c o n s i d e r e d .  Table 6-5: Data Required for AHP application Objectives accuracy efficiency of drilling efficiency of blasting ease of design cost of option simplicity of option Options drill monitoring techno re-training/restructurin status quo The  Abbreviation accu drl_eff blst_eff design cost simp abbreviation Tech Train Quo  H V C d e c i s i o n - m a k e r t h e n e v a l u a t e d the v a r i o u s o b j e c t i v e s a c c o r d i n g to the A H P r u l e s  (the a c t u a l s p r e a d s h e e t is i n c l u d e d i n the a p p e n d i c e s ) . T a b l e 6-6 responses  a n d T a b l e 6-7  are the results o f the A H P a n a l y s i s .  represents the T h e consistency  evaluator's index  was  d e e m e d satisfactory for all tables.  Table 6-6: Results from the AHP evaluation  Tech Train Quo  Results accu drl eff blst eff d e s i g n c o s t s i m p 0.65 0.06 0.19 0.25 0.56 0.71 0.25 0.24 0.08 0.50 0.32 0.21 0.10 0.70 0.74 0.25 0.12 0.08  Weight  drl eff blst eff d e s i g n c o s t s i m p accu 0.118 0.078 0.308 0.059 0.118 0.319  Table 6-7: Final Score for HVC-AHP example  Tech Train Quo  Overall Score 0.404 Winner of the final outcome 0.260 0.336  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  121  The decision-maker's assessment coincides with the decision that was taken. The status quo option scored close to the technology option, most likely due to its high score in the heavily weighted 'cost' variable. When asked, the decision-maker considered this CIA methodology to be applicable to the AQUILA technology. It was considered to be 'very useful'; however, apprehension was expressed as to the acceptability of the method at higher management levels since the method requires a lengthy (1 hr.) explanation before the decision maker has confidence in using the method. 6.2  Case Study 2: CAES  Technology & Ore Blending  This section presents the practical application of a level 3 CIA method for a level 3 technology. This case study was not intended to justify the technology, but rather to consider some alternative CIA methods. The discussion focuses on a single aspect of the ore blending project. The first subsection discusses the reasoning for selecting the single aspect of the project for justification. The second step in this case study is to present the methodology behind the justification. This will be followed by the interpretation of the results and the conclusions that can be derived from the study. 6.2.1 Weakness in Current Justification of Ore Blending project.  The ore-blending project was never directly explained to the decision-makers who are responsible for the CAES technology acquisition. The AFE, entitled 'Digital Radio Network' (a copy is in the appendices) justifies the technology in terms of benefits to the mine. The benefits listed in the AFE are presented below. • • •  Reduction in data collection time (data collected automatically) Flexibility to expand up-coming technological tools Optimization of explosives loading  • •  Optimization of the planning and updating cycle between field and office systems. Better use of technical manpower for production control, geotechnical monitoring and evaluation, and blasting optimization.  •  Improvement of data integrity as data will be accessible through CAES office wherever it is required. Visual interpretation of data allows the user to better inspect data for accuracy and integrity.  • •  Reduction in record keeping errors due to the fewer translations of data. Elimination of shovel delays due to data transfers.  The system was evaluated only on the benefits that would be achieved for the mine, not the mill. This is a significant limitation considering that the proposed ore-blending project would generate substantial savings. It is not known if this is a company-wide limitation (to restrict  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  122  capital asset purchases based on departmental needs), or if it was imposed on the evaluation due to the uncertainty of the ore-blending project. The blending project, as discussed in the Chapter 5, was a proposal from the senior metallurgist, working in the mill. The senior metallurgist was unable to provide data or other expert opinion to support the assumptions. Therefore there may have been too much uncertainty in the project to be included in the AFE. This case study attempts to reduce some of the uncertainty concerning the assumptions of the project. The uncertainties of new technology also encouraged management to be apprehensive about the acquisition of a radio network. Few such radio networks are currently used in mines. Site visits to a similar mine using the technology (Phelps Dodge's Morency mine) were planned for the senior mine engineer in November. An agreement between the Caterpillar supplier, Finning, has also been formed where the technology will be installed on a limited scale and as an evaluation. This would be similar to the suggestion of using value analysis, as discussed in chapter 3. The details of the commercial arrangements are understandably unavailable for publication; however, it can be mentioned that HVC will pay for this limited technological exposure. The justification presented in this case study is incomplete. The full benefits of this technology to the company (including the mine, mill, overhead and environmental benefits) were not assessed. The purpose of this thesis was not to justify any particular technology, but rather to identify and evaluate the CIA methods that would be appropriate and to give examples. Therefore only some variables in the ore-blending project will be investigated in this case study. The previous chapter described the ore-blending project. From the description, it can be seen that the nature of the ore is a variable that is uncontrollable. The ability to control blending, considering the current conveyor network, is also an uncertain variable. These two variables are discussed below. Variability of the ore: Current ore hardness contours shows that the hardness of the ore is highly variable. However, if the variability in hardness in later stages of the mine life becomes much less (ore becomes of uniform hardness), then the benefits of a blending system will be eliminated. The minimum variability of the ore may be an important value to determine although for the purposes of this case study, average variability and hardness values are used. Blending ability. Due to copper prices and the uncertainty of this project, little capital expenditure will be spent on the mine's blending ability (no capital purchases are planned for the next 2 years: the company predicts that the copper prices will increase at that time). The project must be justified using the equipment that is currently in-place. The network of Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  123  conveyors, trippers, surge piles, storage piles and dispatch systems have limitations that will not allow any possible blend. Considering the average (or most likely) hardness variability and values, an important question is: what is the best possible reduction in feed variability using the current materials handling network? This uncertain element will be the focus of the following study. 6.2.2 Simulation Description Object-based simulation software (Extend4™ from Imagine That) and spreadsheets (Microsoft Excel™) were used to study the two uncertainties described above. Raw data was collected pertaining to the materials handling network. Due to the complexity of the network, the simulation was designed and constructed in 'modules'. Some of the important assumptions within each module are described here. 6.2.2.1 Ore Generating Module  The ore generating module can be seen in Figure 6-2. This group of nodes generates discrete blocks of ore that represent 172 tons, i.e. one truck load. The module was linked to a spreadsheet where data could be easily changed as more accurate information was added to the model. The data entry table is seen in the figure below. Table 6-8: Simulation data entry table Valley 1 & 2  Hardness Block size  Grade Block size  Lornex  Min  Max  Min  Max  27.5 20 0.3 20  52.5 30 0.5 50  14.5 50 0.25 50  24.5 75 0.4 75  Random number generator nodes vary the ore grade based on known data such as 'LI Gr Min', which represents the first ore loading station (a virtual shovel) in the valley pit (LI). The grade and hardness are varied independently; however, since grade was not an important variable to the success of the project, the relationship between the grade and hardness of the ore in the valley pit was not considered. The hardness of the ore was determined through the variables 'LIHr Gr Min', 'LIHr Gr Max', 'LI Hr Min' and 'LI Hr Max' that represent the minimum and maximum number of consecutive ore blocks with similar hardness and the minimum and maximum hardness of the ore blocks. These are connected to random number generators that use these parameters to create an entire blasted bench of single truck loads (when initially generated, one entity represents a 172 ton truck load, several thousand entries can be created, representing blasted muck).  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  124  Figure 6-2: Ore Generating Module, Extend™ Simulation  There are three ore generating modules in the model to represent the three ore truck and shovel systems feeding the mill. The hardness figures and size of blocks were determined using data that was available at the time of development. Therefore, the two valley ore generating modules are identical while the Lornex module reflects the lower grade and lower hardness of the Lornex pit. 6.2.2.2 Alternating truck allocations module As discussed in the previous chapter, trucks have a tendency to dump into the same crusher despite the mill's request for trucks to dump into both crushers in an alternating fashion. For example, a truck loading at a particular ore shovel would dump first into crusher 4, then on the next trip, into crusher 5. The ore blending project will use truck dispatch as thefirststage of blending, where an algorithm would determine where each truck should dump (crusher 4 or crusher 5). Due to the complexity of such an algorithm, a simple alternating network of nodes was designed. Trucks leading from Valley shovel 1firstdump into crusher 4, then into crusher 5 on the next load. Figure 6-3 depicts these activity nodes on the model.  Figure 6-3: Alternating truck allocation, Extend™ Simulation  In developing such a model, several of the project's potential difficulties were made evident. A simple optimization algorithm was unable to determine the optimum truck allocation and Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  125  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  ore blend simultaneously. There are several reasons for this difficulty. The first deals with the delayed outcome of altering the blend at the face. A delay will occur between the time of excavation and entry into the mill; therefore predictions must be made as to where the shovel will excavate the next ore block so that an appropriate blend can be computed. Other differences may occur due to feed rates along the network as the feed rate may change from the time of calculation and movement from the crusher to the surge pile. 6.2.2.3 Blending on Crusher Apron Feeder Module  As discussed in the previous chapter, the feeder apron capacity on the in-pit crushers is 500 tons (3 truck loads). The simulation assumes that the crushing and feeding action blends the ore. A 'hierarchical' (a node that contains several other nodes within it, a space saving technique) node was developed. The node is represented in the model as a white square and its contents appear as seen in thefigurebelow.  ig^jConlOuT  Figure 6-4: Blending on Crusher Apron, Extend™ Simulation  This network of nodes calculates the average grade and hardness of each block, then resets the value of each block's attributes to the calculated averages. The 'select' node is used to route the elements into the three branches so only 3 consecutive truckloads of ore are blended. The 'info' nodes were used for debugging purposes. The 'Get A' nodes read the attributes of the entities passing through the node. The 'Eqr' nodes, in the blending module, calculates the average hardness and grade for the three elements passing through, then sends this value to the 'SetA' node where the average 'Hardness' and 'Grade' attributes are set to the 3 element passing through. The 'Batch' node (the block with 'demand' written underneath) batches 3 element together and sets their attributes according to the values of the last element (whose attributes were set to the average values). rd  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  126  A similar node is used to blend the ore on the surge pile. L i m i t e d blending control is possible on the surge pile, where the controlling variables are the draw rates o f the feeders below the pile. This f o r m o f blend optimization was not simulated.  6.2.2.4 Optimization of Feed onto Storage Piles Module A s discussed i n the previous chapter, the r u n - o f mine f r o m various crushers can be blended together so that an o p t i m u m blend is deposited on the three storage piles.  There are  limitations to the possible distributions. These possible blends are seen i n the figure below. A n optimization algorithm was used to determine the X , Y , and Z variables. These represent the percentages o f feed from each crusher to each pile.  Figure 6-5: Distributions of X, Y and Z, for piles 1,2 and 3 Programming was required to calculate the X , Y and Z values in real time, using the hardness values o f the ore blocks that were drawn f r o m the surge pile or Lornex p i t . T o the author's knowledge, no real-time optimization node exists f o r E x t e n d 4 ™ . A n optimization program on E x c e l ™ was developed f o r a series o f hardness values on a three dimensional array. The o p t i m u m blend distributions f o r five possible hardness values for crushers 4 and 5 and 2 possible hardness values f o r Lornex were calculated. The table below represents the array. The six digit figures i n the table represent the X , Y and Z values f o r the blend distributions. Once this 6-digit value was determined, a calculation w i t h i n the simulation separates the three values using a modulus function. A n example is presented below the table. Table 6-9: Ideal Blends Lornex Pit 17 Hardness  30 35 40 45 50  30 35 40 10150 11278 11092 120122 10150 12759 100108 270141 245139 180902 383826 149901 383801 418307 278801  ] Crusher 4 hardness 45 50 30 91898 383899 10150 383874 834193 200117 991499 992799 280104 179901 992099 502502 209901 993899 626201  Lornex Pit 22 Hardness 35 40 45 50 12083 12896 255098 626299 510167 17533 626274 996099 750167 596546 994699 995499 626226 469901 757550 995598 609901 549901 559902 818150  Example o f crusher 4 (45 Hardness H d . ) , crusher 5 (35 H d . ) and Lornex (17 H d . ) , and ideal blend figure ( I B F - 383874), using equation;  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  127  X = (IBF - MOD(IBF,10000))/1000000 Y= (MOD((IBF - MOD(IBF, 100)), 10000)/10000 Z= MOD(IBF,100)/100 Equation 6-1: Extraction of X,Y and Z figures from IBF  X = (383874 - MOD(383874,10000))/1000000 = 0.38 Y= (MOD((383874 - MOD(383874,100)), 10000)/10000 = 0.38 Z= MOD(383874,100)/100=0.17 Using the X, Y and Z values, the hardness values of the resulting pile feed was calculated using the equations below. Pile 1 Hardness = Lx*(l-Z)/(2-Z-X)+C5(l-X)/(2-Z-X) Pile 2 Hardness = Lx*(Z)/(l-Y+Z)+C4*(l-Y)/(l-Y+Z) Pile 3 Hardness = C4*(Y)/(X+Y)+C5*X/(X+Y) Equation 6-2: Pile Hardness Equations  Where: Lx - Lornex feed, C4 - crusher 4 feed C5 - crusher 5 feed Pile 1 Hardness = 17*(l-0.17)/(2-0.38-0.17)+35(l-0.38)/(2-0.38-0.17)=29.75 Pile 2 Hardness = 17*(l-0.38)/(l-0.38+0.17)+45*0.17/(l-0.38+0.17)=29.75 Pile 3 Hardness = 45*(0.38)/(0.38+0.38)+35*0.38/(0.38+0.38)=40 The Excel™ optimization algorithm attempts to alter the distributions so that the piles conform to the average hardness possible in the hardness range. The equations below calculate how the average hardness of pile 1: average ore hardness from source X = (Minimum. Hardness + Maximum Hardness)/2 (assuming uniform distribution) average ore hardness to Storage Pile X = (Average from source 1 + Average from source 2)/2 (assuming identical production rates from both sources) Equation 6-3: Average Ore hardness for Storage PileX  Example: Storage Pile 2 average ore hardness from crusher 4 = (27.5 + 52.5)/2=40  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  128  average ore hardness from Lornex = (14.5 + 24.5V2 = 19.5 average ore hardness to storage pile 2 =  (40+19.5)/2=29.75  The node structure for the blend distributions and final pile hardness calculations are shown in Figure 6-6. The values of 500-ton (size of the elements following the blend at the crushers) slices of the storage pile are recorded onto an output file. The output file is read by an Excel™ spreadsheet that subsequently calculates the average deviation of the 500 ton elements for the entire simulation run. The simulation run is 1000 time units. The factor of time was not a consideration in this simulation since the variable under study was the variability of the storage piles. The simulation was run 100 times using the optimized distributions of X, Y and Z and a distribution where the X, Y and Z values were all 50, no matter what the hardness (this was to simulate the current methodology of blending the ore). The average deviations of the optimized and manual adjustment from the 100 runs and 3 piles were averaged and compared, see Figure 6-7 (data can be found in the appendix 6). The optimized blending was determined to have 11% lower variability than the assumed base case.  Figure 6 - 6 : Decision and Calculation Module for ideal blend  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  129  Average Deviation from mean 3.5 3  .1  2.5  .2 Q  0.5  Optimized «—50/50/50  0 Simulation runs Figure 6-7 : Average deviation for runs for pile 1  6.2.3 Simulation Results  The simulation determined that an 11% reduction of variability would result from using an optimized blending algorithm. For each percentage reduction in variability, it was determined that it would result in increased recovery that may, in turn, could be considered an economical return. The chief metallurgist estimated a possible $12 million dollar increase in revenue; however, these are only preliminary estimates. More study would have to be conducted to determine the economic impact of each percentage reduction in ore variability. 6.2.4  Validity of the results  There are several major deficiencies in this particular simulation. The following sections describe these weaknesses. 6.2.4.1 Lack of real-time optimization algorithm  As discussed previously, the simulation software package, Extend4™, did not have an optimization algorithm within its object libraries. The simulation used a three dimensional array to determine the optimum blend. Due to the limitations of the simulation software, the distributions were calculated for hardness in 5 index point increments, as seen in Table 6-9, where the crusher 4 and 5 hardness values range from 30, to 50 in 5 point increments. Hardness values are rarely exact values once they reach the decision module of the simulation, introducing significant error as shown in Table 6-10. An optimization algorithm must be integrated into the system that is capable of pooling all available data. This source of  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  130  error increases the variability in the calculations, signifying that the estimates were an underestimate of the potential revenues. Table 6-10: Example of Possible errors given 5 hardness increments  actual Simulation  Crusher Values C4 C5 Lx 32.2 47.0 23.0 30.0 45.0 22.0  Error 5.57 0.00  6.2.4.2 Lack of other blending control mechanisms  Due to the limited time and scope of this simulation justification, not all of the blending control mechanisms were designed and simulated. Several other blending mechanisms with limited or full control were listed in the previous chapter. Had these been added to the simulation, it is highly probable that the ore hardness variability would further decrease, thereby increasing potential revenue. 6.2.4.3 On-site characteristics not fully modeled  The effect of preventative maintenance (PM) and incidental shutdowns were not modeled in the simulation. Furthermore, production rates from each ore source were assumed to be equal in the simulation. Consumption rates from the various ore processing lines were neglected. These factors should be considered when designing the final blending project. Since, these factors reduce the amount of control over the ore blends, they will reduce the project's ability to blend better than the existing system (for example, the reduction in variability will be reduced from 10% to 7%). 6.2.4.4 Milling Characteristics  The simulation assumes that every grinding line processes ore at the same rates given identical hardness. Studies should be conducted to determine the optimal variability (or lack thereof) for each grinding line, based on maximizing profit. For example, if it is more profitable to grind variable ore on line B than line C, line C should receive the more variable blend. This study may increase the complexity of the final algorithm but a definite increase in profit should be expected. 6.2.4.5 Ore Variability  The ore on-site does not have a truly uniform distribution of ore hardness between the values 27.5 and 52.5. At the time of the simulation development, limited information was available on ore hardness, since the ore hardness contours were not yet fully available. Current information suggests that the ore hardness in the Valley pit varies between 5 and 65. The  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  131  mean hardness is found to be around 40 and the distribution resembles a flat normal curve skewed to the right. This new information could be added to the simulation; however, significant changes to the blending module would be required, which may decrease the ability to provide the optimal blend. For example, not all ore hardness blends would provide the ideal hardness at the storage pile. At extreme values, errors (differences between the ideal 29.75 for Pile 1 &2 and 40 for Pile 3) would appear. Table 6-11 reveals the errors that result on the various storage piles, despite having an optimal mix (the least amount of error possible). Table 6-11: Divergence from ideal blend at extreme feed hardness values Lornex Pit: 17 Hardness  ^30! o f 2 35 3- 40 ft) " —45 cn 50  11 3 0 J 0  Lornex Pit: 22 Hardness Crusher 4 hardness  35 11 7 0 0 0  40 3 0 0 1 4  0 0 1 5 8  45  50 o o 4 8 10  30 8 0 0 o  35 0 0 1  40 o 0 0 2 5  0 0 2 5 8  45  50 0 1 5 8 10  From the table above, it can be seen that when the Valley sources (crusher 4 and 5 feed) are at extremes, divergence from the 'ideal' blend increases. When considering on-site hardness values of 65, it is reasonable to assume that a great deal of divergence from the ideal blend would occur, given a similarly high hardness from the other Valley sources. This may reduce the reduction in variability possible (hence the value of the enabling technologies). 6.2.4.6 Limitations of the Hardware  Large conveyor belts, rock boxes and conveyor belts may not be able to vary their speeds, flows or feed rates as easily as represented in the simulation. With increased use comes increased maintenance costs. Therefore the limitations of the hardware should be considered when the project is being designed. Examples of the simulation's weakness in overestimating the hardware's capacity can be related to conveyor belts and storage piles. In some cases, the ideal mix would be achieved by sending a great deal of ore onto a single belt, while leaving another empty. For example, consider the 'ideal' blend when the feeds are at values: C4-35, C5-50 and Lx-22. The resulting blend sends 60% of the feed from crusher 4 and almost all of the crusher 5 feed onto the belt leading to pile 3. The belt may not have the capacity to hold this amount of ore. A further problem occurs if the situation lasts longer than the active cone on pile 2 because relatively little ore is being sent to that pile. The 'ideal' blends that choke off ore to certain piles are presented in the table below.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  132  Table 6-12: Neglected Storage Piles Lornex Pit 17 Hardness 30  35  40  5 35 §• 40 "CD 45  P1  50  P2  cn  Lornex Pit 22 Hardness Crusher 4 hardness 45 50 ^ 3 0  35  40  45  50 |  P1 P1 P1  P1  P1 P1  P1  This situation may reduce the project's ability to reduce the ore variability. The simulation did not take these hardware characteristics into account; however, the final project design should. 6.2.5  Application of Simulation Results  The simulation results would normally not be applicable at this stage sincefinancialcosts and benefits have not been determined. The simulation results would apply to the financial results by decreasing the uncertainty thereby allowing the hurdle rates to be decreased. The financial benefits estimated by the simulation (once a value per percentage reduction in ore variability has been determined) may be included in the financial appraisal of the project if management is satisfied with the results. These results can be further analyzed using decision trees. This technology may enable similar projects to be implemented that would produce other benefits. The example below considers all the possible projects that the technology would enable. Probabilities were estimated based on the author's assumptions. Table 6-13: Decision Tree Probabilities for Blending project Prob. of immediate implementation Success 0.401 Failure 0.60 If indicator... Success Implement  0.70 Failure 0.90 Abandon  0.30 0.10  gives negative eva uation Success 0.10 Failure Implement 0.10 Abandon  0.90 0.90  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  133  Table 6-14: Decision Tree Numerical Values for Blending Project  Values in '000,000's Costs Benefits Project ($2.00) $7.0 Radio sample ($0.03) -  Figure 6-8: Decision Tree for Blending Project  The decision tree above predicts that the project should be accepted, given the assumptions; however, when considering the estimated utility curve for HVC (derived from conversation with the superintendent of engineering), this conclusion may not be as certain. The utility curve and subsequent utility decision tree below show the inconclusive results of the evaluation, given the assumptions. 4_. - 4 9 - ._.  —.. —  r  ...  —  ....  -48- - - .--47- ._.  —  _._ I — I — - i —  —  -•-  :" v  ...  y. _.  -•-  'l.-j.-..  —  | —j  hA  - - Org-  0.5 0.4  f--- - - -  i ':  ,  I'.l  -.-  ---0:3- . . . .  _._  ---  _.^._.L._  —  - -42----  ---  _.-  ---j.-.f--  —  - -4i-  •-•  _._  - - - i - - - f •-  —  --•  i_o-5 -4 -3 -2 -1  0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7  8  9 10 11  Rayoff ($'000,000)  Figure 6-9: Utility Curve for blending project  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Figure 6-10: Decision Tree considering utility  This subsection does not represent an accurate evaluation. It simply reflects the ability to apply decision trees and utility functions to the appraisal. Decision analysis tools are applicable to this technology acquisition but should only be completed once all the benefits and costs have been identified. 6.2.6 Conclusion and Recommendations for Case Study 2 Several conclusions can be drawn from the above discussion of case study 2. •  The analysis of the simulation revealed several weaknesses of the simulation. These weaknesses must be identified prior to submission of the appraisal to the decision-maker. Failure to identify the shortcomings of the justification may weaken the appraisal and thereby reduce certainty.  •  Uncertainty is one of the most important characteristics that the above simulation attempts to reduce. Revealing some of the shortcomings of the project, analyzing the potential benefits, and documenting these findings reduce the uncertainty of the project, which in turn increases its value. The simulation above, when presented to HVC decision makers and project evaluators, considered it 'very useful'. Knowledge of the value of some variables would allow the evaluators to speak to the decision-makers, through HVC's sound management relations, about the potential benefits of the project.  •  Despite the positive assessment from HVC staff, some apprehension was expressed as to the validity of the simulation results. Since this is their first exposure to this form of justification, it is understandable that some apprehension was expressed. Through further dissemination of these techniques throughout the industry, increased credibility would be attributed to the conclusions derived from these CIA methods.  •  As discussed previously, the justification of the CAES technology is incomplete. Nevertheless, at this stage in the evaluation of such a technology, no further simulation  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 6 - Practical Examples of the Justification Schemes  135  was required. The justification simulation should focus on justifying further study of the benefits and costs of the system. More in-depth study and evaluation should be the result of a positive judgment (by the decision-makers) of the above justification. The simulation revealed many of the potential costs and benefits attributable to the project and these observations can be used as a template for further study •  HVC management has decided to continue studying the ore blending project; however, considering the current price of copper, little hope is expressed in being allowed to purchase capital equipment.  •  As can be seen from most of the conclusions above, the perception of uncertainty is a major concern. No psychological experimentation or studies were conducted relating to decision-maker's perceptions of risk; however, this is an important topic and should be mentioned. The techniques presented in this paper attempt to dispel prejudices against new technologies through analytical justification tools.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 7 - Conclusions and Recommendations  7 7.1  136  Conclusions and Recommendations Summary  of the  Investigation  The primary objective of this thesis is to identify, evaluate, and demonstrate the usefulness of various decision-making tools for the justification of advanced technologies in the mining industry. It has focused particularity on the technologies that relate to the evolution of automation in surface mining. The work nonetheless is considered applicable to all forms of mining. This investigation has addressed this objective by: 1. Identifying the need for new technology (Chapter 1); 2. Identifying the need for CIA methods that are better suited for advanced technology (Chapter 2-3) 3. Recognizing the requirement for less reliance on single value comparative justification schemes that incorporate too little information (Chapter 1-3); 4. Discussing the need to focus on long term profitability as opposed to short-term gain (Chapter 3); 5. Identifying CIA methods and technology classification schemes based on manufacturing operations management theory and practice, and adapting these for the mining industry (Chapter 3-4); 6. Discussing the applicability of manufacturing operations management in the mining industry (Chapter 3); 7. Identifying weaknesses in current capital appraisal approaches when applied to new technology (Chapter 3-4); 8. Providing the theory and mining-based hypothetical examples of several key CIA methods (Chapter 4) 9. Providing practical examples of some of the key assessment approaches based on open pit technologies (Chapter 5) 10. Determining management's impression of the evaluation methods for the practical examples (Chapter 5).  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 7 - Conclusions and Recommendations  7.2  Significant  137  contributions made by this thesis include:  1. A comparative review of both manufacturing and mining to show the similarities of the two industries in an attempt to facilitate the flow of innovation from manufacturing into mining (Chapter 3); 2. The development of a classification scheme to allow technology evaluators to apply the correct justification method to an appropriate level of technology (Chapter 3). 3. A comprehensive simulation of a material handling network that reveals the usefulness of simulation as an analytical tool design and justification tool (Chapter 5); 4. The identification of the need to integrate the mine and the mill operations (Chapter 6). 7.3  Conclusions  7.3.1 Thesis Stimulus The area of study of this thesis was the application of new capital appraisal techniques for advanced technology in the mining industry. This subject was inspired by the need for the mining industry to use more technology that increases efficiency, environmental conservation, safety and responsible use of resources. These technologies usually have benefits that are qualitative or difficult to account for financially. Such technology need to be appraised using methods that can account for all costs and benefits. The manufacturing industry was faced with similar problems justifying technologies whose benefits were mostly qualitative. Tools were developed by the manufacturing industry that can be used to accurately appraise all costs and benefits of new technology currently available for use in the mining industry. 7.3.2 Review of the CIA methods A classification scheme was suggested that aids those undertaking the appraisal to select the methods that best suit a particular technology. Therefore, as the complexity and integration of the technology increases, the complexity and involvement (time required, expense, etc..) of the method most suitable for that particular technology similarly increases. Level 1 technology's benefits are well understood and usually quantitative. Traditional appraisal techniques such as NPV and IRR can be used to accurately appraise this level of technology. Level 2 technology integrates the activities within a process. For example, integrating the GIS with the engineering LAN allows the integration of survey and engineering activities into a single engineering design process. These benefits are more qualitative such as increased efficiency, design quality, safety, and flexibility. Methods such as programming models, options pricing and scoring models are ideal for this level of complexity. Level 3 technology integrates entire processes. Since mining processes are large, information Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 7 - Conclusions and Recommendations  138  intensive and complex, level 3 CIA methods are used to understand and predict the effects of certain changes on the overall system. Level 3 CIA methods, such as simulation and decision analysis, capture large amounts of information, and are more useful for modeling these complex systems. All appraisals require the application of financial appraisal methods, although, the importance of the conclusions should decrease with each increase in technology level. Improvements in the accuracy of these methods can be made by knowing the weaknesses of these methods such as the tendency to ignore qualitative benefits, making false assumptions about the future, focusing on the short term, and management's tendency to rely on hurdle rates. Managerial practice is a key issue in CIA. Managers must understand and trust the appraisal method before basing a decision on the data that the method provides. Examples of these methods, both hypothetical and practical were provided in this thesis to help advance the credibility of these CIA techniques. 7.3.3 Review of the Main Conclusion of the Practical Applications The practical application of new technology-oriented appraisal techniques has set the industrial context of this work with respect to past initiatives in the manufacturing industry and future directions in the mining industry. Several key issues, based on managerial practice, were identified in the application of these techniques in the context of the case studies. The issue of managerial acceptance of these appraisal methods is prevalent since, without the understanding or recognition of the decision makers, the tools described in this thesis will not be used in the mining industry. Managerial attitude further impacts on the level of effort that should be applied to an evaluation. The effort and expense of an appraisal should be directly proportional to the perceived level of complexity and stage of development of the project under evaluation. The second issue of managerial practice that is prevalent throughout every stage of design and implementation of a new mining technology is the over-reliance on empirical techniques. Scientific management tools have become much more accessible due to new inexpensive software packages such as spreadsheets and simulation programs. More accessible and userfriendly programs should facilitate mining's divestiture of the rule-of-thumb. Finally, managerial reliance on single value comparative appraisal methods such as the NPV are still useful; however, their perceived relevance should be reduced. Uncertainties should not be taken into account by the application of blanket hurdle rates that do not take in account various scenarios or the true situation. Middle management interest and response to the case study results at HVC, show that the methods described in this thesis are applicable for advanced technology assessment.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 7 - Conclusions and Recommendations  139  Management at HVC recognizes the new technology's benefits such as increased competitiveness, safety, efficiency, environmental conservation and intelligent planning and design. This thesis has aimed to advance the ability of the mining industry to adopt new technologies so that the benefits received will revitalize the mining industry. 7.3.4  Validity of the Approach  The ultimate purpose of this thesis is to provide current mine management with the will and knowledge required to accurately appraise new technologies. The methodology of the thesis intended to provide purpose, reasoning, theory, and, examples. This thesis began by discussing the purpose and reasoning behind why this topic should be explored. Definitions were provided to clarify terms that were used repeatedly throughout the thesis. The classification scheme and appraisal methods described in this thesis were originally developed for the manufacturing industry. A discussion of the validity of such methods in a mining context was needed. The methods and examples were provided to illustrate the usefulness of these methods. Finally, practical examples of these methods, in the appraisal of advanced technologies, provided evidence that these methods can be used in a mining context. The challenge of communicating this message to industry decision-makers still remains. The methodology of this thesis is lacking in promoting these CIA methods to the industry. Marketing these methods to decision-makers and project evaluators in venues, such as workshops, would have allowed a greater appreciation of the problems involved in evaluating the true value of new technology. Advancing the skill level of management skills in mining to levels equal to those found in other industries should have been part of the final plan of the thesis.  7.4 Recommendations Future work should include the following: 1. Efforts should be made to expose these CIA methods to the mining industry, especially to higher level decision-makers, in order to promote awareness of appraisal methods for advanced technologies; 2. The analytical tools employed in this study, i.e. Decision Analysis and AHP, justify further refinement. This should be achieved through further practical applications. For example, using Azzone's options approach, linear optimization, valuation of flexibility, and decision analysis in various other applications will allow refinements of the procedures to be made;  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Chapter 7 - Conclusions and Recommendations  140  3. The confidence intervals relating to the validity of simulation results should be identified: the precision of the results of the simulation should be relative to the amount of money that is to be invested in the next step of evaluation or implementation. 4. Alternative CIA methods should be introduced into tertiary mining education, identifying the weaknesses of traditional methods in their application to new technologies; 5. A valuable step in the development of appraisal technique could be to evaluate alternative techniques in differing corporate cultures or social contexts, for example as would be found in other countries.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Bibliography  8  141  References  Allan, D., The cost of capital.,  Administrator, June 1992 Amon, Frank. "HVC mine budget, 1998", HVC Internal document AQUILA mining systems ltd. "Paving the way for total mining systems", AQUILA promotional pamphlet, 1997 AQUILA mining systems ltd. "Drill monitoring mannual", AQUILA program documentation, 1997 Ashford, R.W.; Dyson, R.G.; Hodges, S.D.; The Capital-Investment Appraisal of New Technology: Problems, Misconception and Research Direction Journal of Operational Research Society. Vol.39, No.7, pp.637-642, 1988 Baldwin, R.H., How to assess investment proposals.,  Harvard Business Review, May/June, 1959 Camm, Jeffery D., Evans, James R., Management Science; Modeling, Analysis and Interpretation., South-Western College Publishing, 1996 Canada, John. And Willan G. Sullivan, Economic and Multiattribute Evaluation of Advanced Manufacturing Systems. Prentice Hall, 1989 Carrasco, Hector and Lee, Shih-Ming, Economics ofAdvanced Manufacturing Systems During System Design and Development,  Economics of Advanced Manufacturing Systems, Ed. H.R. Paraei et.al., 1992, Chapman &Hall Caterpillar "CAES",  Promotional paper submitted to HVC by Finning Inc.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Bibliography  142  Cleland, David I.; Bidanda, Bopaya The Automated Factory Handbook Technology and Management TAB Professional and Reference Books, 1990 Coleman, Gregory B. The Business of Engineering: Project Marketing/Project Performance 31 Annual Meeting of the American Association of Cost Engineers, pp. B. 1.1 -B. 1.7, 1987 st  Cominco Ltd. "Highland Valley Copper", http://cominco.com/explore/highland.htmk (14-Sep-98) Dance, Adrian "pictures" personal email (July 15 , 1998) th  Demming, W. Edwards., Quality, Productivity and Competitive Position., Cambridge-MIT, Massachusetts, 1982 De Wit, Dirk The Shaping of automation: A historical analysis of the inter-relation between technology and organization 1950-1985 NGI, Hilversum, 1994 Dunbar, W. Scott, Dessureault, Sean and Scoble, Malcolm, Analysis of Flexible Mining Systems. CIM '98 CD-ROM, 1998 Falster, P.; Mazumder, R.B. Modeling Production Management Systems, North-Holland, Amsterdam, 1985 Fowler, F.G. and Fowler, H.W. The Pocket Oxford Dictionary of Current English., 4 ed., Oxford University Press, London, 1961 th  Fox, Robert W. Strategic and Financial Justification for CIM Proc. 6 Annual Control Engineering Conference, pp.652-656, 1987 th  Gentry, D.W.; O'Neil, T.J. Mine Investment Analysis Society of Mining Engineers, 1984  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Bibliography  143  Gerwin, Donald.; Kolodny, Harvey. Management of Advanced Manufacturing Technology: Strategy, Organization & Innovation Wiley-Interscience, New York, 1992 Getty Copper Corp., Information Pamphlet Hammer, Micheal and Champy, James., Reengineering the Corporation., Harper Business 1 ed. New York, 1993 st  Hanna, Micheal., Introduction to Management Science: Mastering Quantitative Analysis., International Thomson Publishing, 1996 Highland Valley Copper, "A world Class Mine "., Corporate Mission Statement, Highland Valley Copper, "HVC mini fact sheet", Internal publication (1998) Hurrion, R.D. Simulation IFS, Springer-Verlag, 1986 JKMRC,; Optimizing Fragmentation at Highland Valley Copper with respect to Mining & Processing Operations, confidential report prepared for HVC mine, June 1998 Kulatilaka, Nalin, Financial, economic and strategic issues concerning the decision to invest in advanced automation., International Journal of Production Research., vol.22 n.6., 1984 Lefebvre, Michel and Piche, Andre. Transferring new technologies to operations., CIM Bulletin, Vol. 90 no. 1006., January 1997 Lefley, Frank Approaches to risk and uncertainty in the appraisal of new technology capital projects International Journal of Production Economics, Vol. 53, pp.21-33, 1997  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Bibliography  144  Leftley, Frank and Sarkis, J., Short-termism and the appraisal ofAMT capital projects in the US and UK.,  International Journal of Production Research., vol. 35 no. 2. Luenberger, D. G., Investment Science.  Oxford University Press, 1998 Lumby, S., Investment appraisal and Financial Decision., Chapman & Hall., London., 1994 Mattola, Laura., Systems Analysis for Robotic Mining,  Masters Thesis, McGill University, 1996 Meredith, Jack R. and Hill, Justifying New Manufacturing Systems: A Managerial Approach.,  Sloan Management Review, Summer 1987 Meredith and Suresh, Justification Techniques for advanced manufacturing technologies. International Journal of Production Research., vol. 24 no.5, 1986 Nazemetz, J.W., Hammer, Jr., W.E. and Sadowski, R.P., Computer Integrated Manufacturing Systems: Selected Readings  Institute of Industrial Engineers, Norcross Georgia, U.S.A. Noble, David F. Forces of Production: A Social History of Industrial Automation Oxford University Press, New York, 1986 Parsaei, Hamid R., Mital, Anil. Editors, Economics of Advanced Manufacturing Systems. Chapter & Hall. London. 1992 Payne, Thomas A. Quantitative Techniques for Management, A Practical Approach Prentice-Hall, Reston, 1982 Rhodes, Ed., Wield, David. Implementing New Technologies: Innovation and the Management of Technology 2 ed. NCC Blackwell. 1994, Warner, Malcolm., Wobbe nd  Richards, Mark "GPS drill Technology Acquisition- AFE",  HVC internal report  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Bibliography  145  Richards, Mark "Hierarchy" personal email (October 8,1998) Richards, Mark, "information requests" personal email, (October 27, 1998) Robichek, A.A., Myers, S.C., Trends in the use of management science techniques in the use of risk-adjusted discount rates., Journal of Finance., December 1966 Ross, S.A., The current status of the CAPM., Journal of Finance., 1978., 33(2) Samis, Mike, Project evaluation using contingent claims analysis - an overview, Masters Thesis, University of the Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, 1994 Sayers, Beverly A., Human Factors and Decision Making: Their influence on safety and reliability., Proceedings of the Safety and Reliability Society Symposium, 1988, Altricham, UK, 19-20 October 1988 Not used or applicable Schuyler, John R., Decision Analysis in Projects., Project Management Institute, 1996 Shafer, Scott M . and Meredith, Jack R., Operations Management: A process Approach.,  John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1998 Simkus, Ron and Dance, Adrian., Traking Hardness and Aize: Measuring and Monitoring ROM Ore Properties at Highland Valley Copper.,  Mine to Mill - 98, paper intended for conference in Brisbane, as yet unpublished, 1998 Sloan, Douglas A., Mine Management, London; Chapman & Hall, 1983  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Bibliography  146  Szczurek, Theresa M . Champions of Technological Change Garland Studies on Industrial Productivity Garland, New York, 1994 (not used or applicable) Taylor, Frederick Winslow., The Principles of Scientific Management W. W. Norton & Compnay, New York, 1967 (first published in 1911 by Taylor) Vagenas, Nick, Scoble, Malcolm and Baiden, Greg., A review of the first 25 years of mobile machine automation in underground hard rock mines. CIM Bulletin, Vol. 90 no. 1006., January 1997 Waldner, Jean-Baptiste CIM: Principles of Computer-integrated Manufacturing John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1992 Warner, Malcolm; Wobbe, Werner; Brodner, Peter; New Technology and Manufacturing Management, John Willey & Sons, Chichester, 1990 Wills, Barry A., Mineral Processing Technology, 5 ed., Pergamon Press, 1992 th  Winston, Wayne L., Albright, Christian S., Practical Management Science., Duxbury., Belmont. 1997.  Individual Papers from: Parsaei, Hamid R., Mital, Anil., Economics of Advanced Manufacturing Systems. Chapter & Hall. London. 1992 Soni, Ramech G.; Parsaei, Hamid R.; Liles, Donald H. Economic and Financial Justification Methods for Advanced Automated Manufacturing: An Overview, pp. 3-19 Henghold, William M.; LeClair, Steve R. Expert Systems Applied to the Economic Justification Manufacturing Systems, pp.21-36  of Advanced  Bontadelli, James A. Application of the Engineering Economic Analysis Process and Life Cycle Concepts to Advanced Production and Manufacturing, pp. 91-110  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Bibliography  147  Chandra, M . Jeya.; Harmonosky, Catherine M . Analytical techniques for Justification of Manufacturing system p.111-126 Simulation vs. Analytical Models for the Economic Evaluation of Flexible Manufacturing Systems: An Option-based approach p.127-140 Johnson, Thomas H.; Sapp, Richard W. Memo to global competitors; it is time to replace cost accounting with process based information Hundy, B.B.; Hamblin, D.J. Risk Evaluation of Investment in Advanced Manufacturing Technology Nilsson, Carl-Henric; Nordahl, Hakan; Persson, Ingvar Analysis and Evaluation of Flexible Capital Investment Rhodes, Ed., Wield, David. Implementing New Technologies: Innovation and the Management of Technology 2 ed. NCC Blackwell. 1994 Warner, Malcolm., Wobbe, Werner., nd  Bower, Joseph L. Capital Budgeting as a General Management Problem Hayes, Robert H.; Garvin, David A. Managing as if Tomorrow Mattered Gold, Bela Charting a Course to Superior Technology Evaluation Pendlebury, A.J.; Lacey, E. The Economic Justification of Advanced Manufacturing Technology (with special reference to AGVs)  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendices  9  148  L i s t of A p p e n d i c e s  Appendix 1: Integer Programming Appendix 2: Goal Programming Appendix 3: AFE for GPS drill Appendix 4: AFE for Radio Network Appendix 5: HVC Drill monitoring audit & associated appendices Appendix 6: Simulation Results Appendix 7: Options Pricing theory (from Luenberger, 1998  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  149  Appendix 1: Integer Programming  9.1 Appendix  1: Integer  Programming  Optimization models where some or all of the variables must be integers are called integer programming (IP) models" . IP uses math similar to LP modeling. The complex and intricate math involved in IP is not a key aspect of this thesis and therefore will not be explained or presented. An example of how to build and execute a model on a modern spreadsheet tool is provided. Microsoft's Excel program is used to formulate and solve the IP model. 8  Given the following situation: Minecomp, an underground base metal mine, is considering investing in several different technologies. Mine comp is considering upgrading its communications system to provide possible automation. The monetary values of both the investment and estimated return are provided in the table below. Some restrictions are imposed on the model due to technology incompatibilities. These restrictions are also presented below. Table 9-1: Data for Minecomp Example Investment 1 2 3 4 5 6  Description Leaky feeder (low capacity) Leaky feeder (high capacity) Distributed antenna system Radio tech 1 Radio tech 2 Both Radio techs  Abreviation LFL LFH DAS R1 R2 RR  Cash Required NPV (in thousands) $150 $200 $250 $400 $400 $600 $150 $500 $100 $1,750 $250 $3,500  Table 9-2: Restrictions for Minecomp Example Restrictions: Radio tech 1 cannot function with LFL DAS cannot function with LFL Budget of $730,000  The main components to this assessment are: • The investments chosen • The cash required for the investments • Total NPV of the chosen investments This model was developed on Microsoft Excel for Office 97. It can be developed on any version of Excel from Excel 5 to the most recent. The data was entered into the spreadsheet as seen in thefigurebelow. Enter any value in the range from B2: G2. (The values shown in  Winston, et. al., Ibid., pp.214  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  150  Appendix 1: Integer Programming  the figure is the optimal solution.) The total cost value is the total cost of investing in the selected investments, therefore in cell B8, enter the formula =SUMPRODUCT (B2:G2,B4:G4) This function multiplies the array representing the selected investments with the array representing the investment costs. The total NPV of the accumulated projects can be calculated using the same function, except the range B4:G4 is replaced by the range B6:G6. Figure 9-1: Optimal Solution for Minecomp Example A 1 2 3 4  LFL Investment decision Investment Cost  B  C LFH  o  D E F Q RR DAS R1 R2 1 1 1 0 0  $150 $250 $400 $150  5  II 8  NPV total cost  $650  <s  $100  $250  H  1  .J  Restrictions AxB=0 RRKRI RRxFE  0 0  DAS x LFL R1*LFL  0 0  $730 Budget  total NPV  The solver is activated by selecting 'Solver...' from the 'Tools' menu. When the solver window appears, enter the following: 1. Objective, Choose cell B10 as the objective to maximize 2. Changing cell. Select the range B2:G2 as the changing cell 3. Constraints. Select range B2:G2 as binary entries. Next, make the budget constraint by making total costs (B8) equal or less than (D8). The restrictions in the table below represents the products of the two binary values. In order to have either RR or RI (and not both), the product of the two integers must be equal to zero.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 1: Integer Programming  151  Figure 9-2: Solver Window for Minecomp Example  HE3  Solver Parameters  Set Target Cell: Equal To: <T M By Changing Cells;  j$B$10 a x  C Min  j$B$2:$G$2  %J  Solve  C Value of:  Close Guess  Subject to the Constraints: $B$2:$G$2 = binary $B$8 <= $D$8 $J$4 = 0 $J$5 = 0 $J$6 = 0  |  Options Add Change Delete  Reset All Help  As can be seen from the previous figure, the solution to the problem would be to invest in a DAS, while using radio technologies 1 and 2.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 2: Goal Programming  9.2  Appendix  2: Goal  152  Programming  Goal programming is ideal for situations where a company wants to achieve several objectives, given limited resources. Sometimes it is impossible to realize all the objectives simultaneously , but in the solving process, the solution is usually optimized. If the company cares to prioritize its objectives, goal programming can still be used. This method of prioritizing objectives is called a preemptive goal programming approach (will not be explained here but readers are encouraged to review the references). 119  Given the following example: An open pit mining company, OPMC, would like to improve its drilling operations. Management identified three key variables that measure drill performance. The mill would like specific size distribution, therefore fragmentation is a key variable. Due to the geological conditions, accurate drill position is another important variable. Finally, the drilling operation is taking too much time to set-up the drill and begin drilling therefore setup time is the final variable. Management has identified two possible solutions. The first is to undertake an intensive operator-training program. There is an incremental improvement in the three key variables governing drill performance, as seen in the table below. The second solution is the purchase of a drill navigation package offered by Aqmod, a fictional mining technology provider. Each navigation package purchased, provides an incremental improvement in the three drill improvement variables. This data is summarized in the tables below. Table 9-3: Goals for O P M C Example  goal 1: goal 2: goal 3:  Description Abreviation improve fragmentation by Frag improve blast hole position by Pos decrease set-up time S-t  31% 20% 30%  Table 9-4: Improvement Methods for OPMC Example  % improvement/unlF Description Abreviation method 1: Higher level of training Training method 2: Aqmod drill platform Aqmod  Frag 1% 17%  Pos 2% 8%  S-t Cost/unit 3% $ 3,300 1 1 % $80,000  A spreadsheet model, similar to the integer programming model above, will be formulated. The main components to this model are listed below: •  Number of improvement method units purchased Winston, et. al., Ibid., pp. 338  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  153  Appendix 2: Goal Programming  •  Cost of the methods  • Overall improvement The spreadsheet model was formulated as shown in the figure below. (The values represent the optimized solution.) The only computations necessary are total cost and overall improvement. The total costs are calculated using the following function: =SUMPRODUCT($B$8:$C$2,B6:C6) The overall improvement is also calculated in the above fashion, where B6:C6 replaced by B2:C2 and the function is copied to the cells below, so that all the improvements can be calculated. Figure 9-3: Optimal Solution for the OPMC Example ! 1  A  i"  2 ' 3" 4  C Aqmod  1%  17% 8% 11%  Fragmentation Position Set-up time  5  "6~ 7  B Training  Cost/Unit  3%  $ 3,300 S 80,000  10 Cost constraint !  15 I  16  Budget  total cost  <=  "11  12 13 14  A  d-  number purchased  8  Improvement 37% Frag 22% Pos 31% S-t  $170,000 Goal  >= >= >=  31% 20% 30%  The solution is found using the Solver tool provided with Excel. As in the previous problem, the optimal solution is found using the Excel Solver, activated through the 'Tools' menu. When the solver window appears, enter the following (the final solver window should look like the figure below): 1. Objective; there is no target cell for this problem. An optimum solution will be solved automatically, taking into account all the constraints. 2. Changing cells; select the range B8:C8 as the changing cells, and constrain the range to non-negative values 3. Improvement constraint: select the column B14:B16, as greater or equal to the goal column, in this case being E14:E16.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  154  Appendix 2: Goal Programming  4. Budget Constraint: select the cell B11 as being less than or equal to cell E l l . Figure 9-4: Solver Window for O P M C Example  IE  Solver Parameters . S; et Target Cell: Equal To:  j Max  Solve C Min  C Value of:  W  Close  By Changing Cells: — j$B$8:$C$8  Guess  Subject to the Constraints: $B$11 <= $D$11 $B$14 >= $D$14 $B$15 >= $D$15 $B$16 >= $D$16 $B$8:$C$8 = integer $B$8:$C$8 >=0  Options Add Change Delete  Reset All Help  The solution obtained is shown in the figure at the beginning of the example. The optimal solution is to train three operators, while purchasing two Aqmod drill packages. Changing the estimated improvement values incurred from the two methods can alter the solution. Therefore this solution is only as valid as the estimates.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 3: HVC Drill monitoring AFE  9.3 Appendix  155  3: Original AFE  DRILL NAVIGATION AND MATERIAL RECOGNITION SYSTEM PROPOSAL:  It is proposed to purchase a drill navigation and material recognition system for #20-10 Drill at a cost of $147,000.  JUSTIFICATION:  The newest BE49RII drill, #20-11 has recently been equipped with the Aquila drill navigation system. This enables real time location of the drill in three dimensions. Displaying the positional data on a moving map display, the operator can navigate the drill to within 30cm. of the desired location Once the drill is leveled and the hole begun, the system automatically determines the collar elevation and corrects drill hole depths to achieve consistent bench heights. The use of traditional surveying is minimized for both staking and actual hole pick ups. At Highland Valley Copper, one of the greatest demands on surveyor's time is laying out blast holes and picking up actual drill hole locations. The actual drill hole is sometimes up to 0.5m or so away from the planned location; this is partly because of the terrain on the blast pattern and partly because of the difficulty in seeing the stakes as the drill moves over the stake. Stakes tend to be knocked over by the trailing electric cable and by vehicles such as water tankers and service vehicles driving on the pattern. Stakes also get lost in the snow and mud, thus actual locations may easily differ from those planned. There are considerable advantages to be achieved in locating drill holes by an "on drill" computer. GPS provides the locating ability for such a tool. Precise drill positioning and the ability to accurately determine the hole location in three dimensions offers many benefits. Tests at the Fording River Mine have shown that accuracies of better then 30cm. are possible. This is less than a hole diameter and better than a drill operator generally achieves by eye. Currently, the Modular Mining System records the time to drill each holefromwhich maps of penetration rate are drawn. This is a very coarse measurement of hardness, since the penetration rate is affected by such variables as pulldown pressure, bailing air velocity and rock hardness. An accurate knowledge of the ore hardness is important for correct blast design, fragmentation and crusher/mill throughput. By monitoring a number of variables and using an expert system, real time automated analysis of drill variables is possible. Thus, hard versus soft ground or fractures can be displayed and mapped, resulting in optimum blasting and accurate information for hardness blending.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 3: HVC Drill monitoring AFE  156  Justification Page 2 Highland Valley Copper has a fleet of two BE 49RII-120 Drills, one of which is already equipped with a drill navigation system. This drill is equipped with two Trimble 7400 MSI GPS receivers, to give drill position and heading. The attitude of the drill is measured by the BE Programmed Drill Control System. An Aquila Advanced Monitoring Platform (AMP), located in the drillers cabin, processes this data to enable real time location and positioning of the drill. An operator's screen displays a moving map which shows the drill's location relative to the blasthole locations. The expected benefits of a drill navigation and materials recognition system are: a reduction in survey overtime for pattern staking and hole pickups. Manpower reductions have already been made in the mine technical group in anticipation of labour savings from the GPS drill system. a reduction in the consumption of survey materials. the ability to drill patterns more accurately both by position and depth. Thus, drillers will be more accountable for deviating from the drilling plan as a result of quicker hole pickups and on-line reports, each hole gets an accurate collar elevation and the hole depth can be adjusted, producing more even benches and less wear and tear on shovels and trucks. explosive strength can be adjusted according to the measured drillability, thus improving explosives consumption and fragmentation. Optimizing fragmentation will improve diggability reducing wear on shovels, trucks and crushers and improve mill throughput. drill navigation is an essential step on the route to one man, multiple drill operation and automation, being able to better measure rock hardness will improve the ability to blend the ore feed to the mill, automated drill hole surveying and material recognition will provide information for blast design and provide an opportunity for a more automated and productive explosives loading system. COST ESTIMATE: The cost of drill navigation and materials recognition is as follows: Drill navigation hardware and software Materials recognition hardware and software Installation, commissioning and training Total Aquila Costs  US$ 70,000 US$ 13,000 US$ 12.000 US$ 95,000  Bucyrus International modifications Sub-Total  US$ 7,000 US$102,000  Exchange rate CDN $1.34 = US$1.00 Sub-Total  $137,000  P.S.T.  $ 10,000  TOTAL  $147,000  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 3: HVC Drill monitoring AFE  157  Justification Page 3 FINANCIAL ANALYSIS:  The drill navigation and materials recognition system can be purchased for $147,000. It is recommended for the following reasons: • • • • •  A discounted payback period of 1.3 years (see Appendix I) An IRR of 75.1% Projected annual operating savings $146,000 (see Appendix II) The opportunity to improve the fragmentation of the blasted rock and thus crusher and mill throughput. The opportunity to reduce drilling and blasting costs and shovel, truck and crusher maintenance costs.  The cost estimate exceeds the original $100,000 budgeted, as the budget was set prior to the system being available in its present form. A total of $354,000 has been budgeted for GPS related projects, with a remaining balance of $209,000 unspent. It is planned to initiate this project prior to the end of 1996, with commissioning planned by the end of thefirstquarter of 1997.  ENG/MR96080 November 1996  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  158  Appendix 4: Radio Network AFE  9.4 Appendix  4: CAES AFE  DIGITAL RADIO N E T W O R K PROPOSAL: It is proposed to purchase a digital radio network to provide a high capacity data radio link between the Engineering office and field equipment.  JUSTIFICATION: Like many mines worldwide, Highland Valley Copper continually seeks tighter integration between mine planning and mine operations. A tremendous reduction in computional costs and advances in software capability have led to the widespread use of distributed computer systems in mine planning. Excavation plans and blast designs are all in digital form and many "earthwork" projects such as ramps, dumps and reclamation are also being designed digitally. Until recently, transferring these plans to mine operations required costly, manpower-intensive surveys and staking to ensure the mining equipment worked to plan. In turn, acquiring sufficient "as built" information for the next planning stage required additional surveying, often becoming a process delay. In both cases, the transferfromoffice to pit and vice versa, introduces time delays which tend to promote reactive, rather than proactive decisions. Each manual translation step introduces "opportunities" for error and "filtering" by less informed individuals. In addition, surveying is made more difficult by climate and terrain. Stakes can be obscured or displaced during the mining process. The same computional cost and technological advances which have led to digital mine planning have also enabled the break away from manual surveying and staking. Significant breakthroughs in sub-centimetre, high speed GPS receivers has allowed kinematic GPS survey instruments to replace optical total stations in many situations. This technology now enables mining machinery to accurately determine their position relative to plan in real time, without survey stakes. Over the past 18 months, the mine has invested a considerable amount of money in GPS based navigation systems for the three 49R drills and the new P & H 2800 shovel. During 1998, it is planned to extend this technology to the rest of the P & H 2800 fleet and two or three Cat DIO track dozers. In addition, two of the drills are equipped with rock recognition software that operates in conjunction with the navigation system. Currently, data is uploaded and downloaded manually via a laptop computer. This is a labour intensive process that also negatively impacts on the machine production. New bi-directional, high speed wireless data communications enable a real-time link between mine plans and currentfieldstatus, thus keeping engineering and operations "in sync". The Caterpillar digital radio is a part of the new "Computer Aided Earthmoving System" (CAES), that has been developed in partnership with Trimble Navigation - a leading GPS and radio technology company. This system provides near real-time integration of planning and operations and takes advantage of state-ofthe-art digital, spread spectrum radio. The high bandwidth radio provides a wireless Local Area Network (LAN), able to download current plans directfromthe office. The bi-directional radio also allows Managers, Supervisors, and Engineers to access datafromconnected machines across the entire mine. The focal point of the software is METS Manager (see fig. 1). Data is seamlessly translatedfrommine plan to CAT format for transmittal to the pit. The METS Manager also manages the radio system,  ...JI DIGITAL RADIO NETWORK Page 2  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  159  Appendix 4: Radio Network AFE  scheduling and executing all data radio transmissions. After conversion to CAT format, the METS Manager downloads plans to machines. A comprehensive Digital Elevation Model is maintained in CAES office. To ensure currency of data, METS Manager periodically polls machines for new data and updates CAES office. The updated topography can be exported back to the mine planning software as required to ensure synchronization of planning with operations.  CAES Office Mine Planning Software  LAN  Management of: - Communications - Translation of data files for field equipment - Terrain updates to C A E S Office - Export of main site model to mine planning s/ware - Coordinate system  LAN  Shovels  Explosive pump truck  Dozers/ graders  Machine applications  F i g u r e 1: S c h e m a t i c of the M E T S S y s t e m  The installation of a digital radio network enables the mining equipment to become concurrent production measurement tools, tracking excavated and filled areas, blast patterns and rock hardness. CAES office is available to any authorized persons on the mine's LAN to view exactly what is happening in the pit. The expected benefits of a digital radio network are: •  To provide supervision with better monitoring tools and thus reduce losses such as ore/waste reversals.  ...73 DIGITAL RADIO NETWORK Page 3  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 4: Radio Network AFE  •  160  Dramatically reduce the time required to collect data.  •  The provision of a digital radio network is an essential step if the use of high tech tools such as GPS and rock recognition are to be continued and expanded.  •  To provide an essential step in the optimization of explosive loading using actual drilled results.  •  To optimize the cycle between field and office systems.  •  To leverage existing investments in technology. The Partnership has already made a significant investment in mine planning software, GPS and other monitoring and control systems. The proposed system will provide access to important information for those who need it when they need it.  •  To promote better use of technical manpower for production control, geotechnical monitoring and evaluation, and blasting optimization.  •  Improvement of data integrity as data will be accessible through CAES office wherever it is required. Visual interpretation of data allows the user to better check data for accuracy and integrity.  •  A reduction in record keeping errors as there are fewer translations of data.  •  Elimination of delays to shovels due to data transfers.  COST ESTIMATE: The cost for the digital radio system is as follows: Spread Spectrum radios METS Manager software CAES Office software Shovel and Drill Upgrade Installation & Training Sub-total Exchange Rate US$1.00 = Cdn Sub-total Repeater Installation hardware Office PC Total PST @ 7% Total Including Tax  US $35,000 US$30,000 US$30,000 US$33,000 US$25,000 US$163,000 $1.42 Cdn$231,000 $15,000 $3,000 $249,000 $17,000 $266.000  ...IA  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 4: Radio Network AFE  161  DIGITAL RADIO NETWORK Page 4  FINANCIAL ANALYSIS: The digital radio system can be purchased for $266,000, and is recommended for the following reasons: •  A discounted payback period of 1.0 years (see Appendix I)  •  An IRR of 92.8% and a net present value of $659,000.  •  Projected annual operating savings of $412,000. (See Appendix II)  •  Digital radio is essential for the effective use of GPS, rock recognition, etc. in the mine. It will also provide an important link in the ongoing mine-mill optimization plans.  •  Although difficult to quantify, the value of better and more immediate information to Management, Engineering and Supervision is very important if the quality of decisions is to be improved.  •  With the implementation of stakeless blast patterns and digital maps for shovels, there is a need for field supervision to have access to the digital maps in the field for both supervisory and safety reasons.  emc\eng\mr97095  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 5: HVC Drill Audit  Highland Valley Copper  Highland Valley Copper  Drill Navigation and Material Recognition System A.F.E. post audit 96-065  July, 1998  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 5: HVC Drill Audit Appendices  1  163  Executive summary  At the suggestion of Mark Richards, a post audit was undertaken on AFE 96-065 (Purchase of a Drill Navigation and Material Recognition System for Drill #20-10). In order to properly assess the effect of the drill monitoring system, the effect of all similar systems on the mine was evaluated for the audit. A perunit final summary is included in this audit that presents the final outcome of the overall costs and benefits of the 3 systems on a per-unit basis. This audit includes the following items: • comparison of projected and achieved qualitative benefits • list of unpredicted benefits • comparison of projected and achieved financial benefits • actual financial costs • unprejudiced cost savings • addenda: non-numeric justification technique expressing the justified acquisition of the technology After studying the effect of the drill technology on the mine's finances and methodologies, it was concluded that the acquisition was within AFE parameters and even out performed the expectations even though some cost saving practices mentioned in the AFE were not implemented. The financial results are summarized in the tables below: Table 9-5: Actual vs. Predicted Costs Drill navigation and software Materials recognition hardqare and software Installation, commissioning and training Total Aquila Costs  70,000 13,000 12,000 95,000  $ $ $ $  Bucyrus International modifications Sub-total (US $) Subtotal ($CAN - $1.34=US$1) PST Total  7,000 $ 102,000 $ 136,680$ 9,568 $ 146,248 $  101,290 135,728 9,501 145,229  3 units  438,743 $  435,688 $  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  $ $ $ $  Sean Dessureault  164  Appendix 5: HVC Drill Audit Appendices  Table 9-6: Predicted vs. Financial benefits  Anticipated Benefits Quantitative Variables  Predicted  Actual  Comments  Less surveyor o/t Less surveyor matirials. Red. drill & blast costs Reduced shovel costs  $/year $10,800 $33,866 $4,200 $37,705 $104,470 $30,708  Less 'caved' holes Design time for pattern Shovel productivity Drill utilization  Unanticipated Benefits $48,804 cost of drilling caved holes $50,794 extra technician time $125,936 $142,721  none directly attributable  Estimated Benefits Reduced shovel maint. Mill throughput Totals less estimated  Totals  $31,105  $78,000 $32,000  $150,178 $181,283  $439,826 $549,826  none directly attributable  * overall improvement over time period is much higher but drill monitoring may not be the only factor ** values roughly estimated by experts in their respective feilds *** Mainly in terms of ground engaging and cable rope  Table 9-7: Summary of Financial Results, using calculated, total Benefits AFE Payback Period (using DCF $) Payback Period (using Real $) I.R.R. (%) (Using Real $) R.O.I. (%) (NPV / Investment) N.P.V. @ Prescribed Rate  1.3 1.3 75.1 228.1 $335,310  Inital cost  $147,000  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Actual Single unit Single Unit Chronological Variance 1.2 1.3 0.0 1.2 1.3 0.0 77.0 44.5 -1.9 235.2 -7.1 246.8 $341,561 $1,010,064 $ (6,251) $145,229  $409,282  $  1,771  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 5: HVC Drill Audit Appendices  2  165  A . F . E . justification  The following represents a summary of the justification section of the A.F.E. (Appendix A). The A.F.E. contained both economic and analytical justification. Both will be presented.  Analytical The analytical benefits from the drill navigation and materials recognition system that were foretold in the A.F.E. included: 1) The ability to drill patterns more accurately both by position and depth. Thus, drillers will be more accountable for deviating from the drill plan as a result of quicker hole pickups, [accuracy] & [driller accountability] 2) Each hole gets an accurate collar elevation and the hole depth can be adjusted, producing more even benches resulting in improved operating conditions for shovels and trucks, [more even benches] 3) Explosive strength can be adjusted according to the measured drillability, thus improving explosives consumption and fragmentation. Optimizing fragmentation will improve diggabilty, reducing wear on the shovels, trucks and crushers while improving mill throughput, [less explosives consumption] & [better fragmentation] 4) Drill navigation is an essential step towards single operator-multiple drill operations and automation, [automation option] 5) Automated drill hole surveying and material recognition will provide information for blast design and provide opportunity for a more automated and productive explosives loading system, [material recognition] & [more informed design] & [improved explosives loading] The success and validity of the benefits mentioned above will be assessed in a further section. Additional benefits, not mentioned in the A.F.E, will be discussed.  Financial  benefits  The following financial benefits were calculated in the A.F.E. (Appendix A) •  discounted payback period of 1.3 years  •  IRR of 75.1%  •  projected annual operating savings of $146,000  •  0.01% improvement in throughput ($30,000/yr. at 90 eVlb.)  •  reduced shovel costs of $30,708/yr.  •  reduced drill & blast costs of $ 104,470/yr.  •  A reduction in survey overtime for pattern staking and hole pickups  • A reduction in the consumption of survey materials The financial estimates calculated in the A.F.E. will be compared to the actual savings. financial benefits will also be calculated to supplement the actual financial estimates.  3  Additional  Capital Expenditures  The capital outlay for the GPS system and software was listed as a single expense in the accounting ledger. It is unclear if the training and installation of the equipment is included in the price. However, installation and training was not seen as a major expense, considering the operators easily adapted to the new navigation method, within days of its implementation.  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 5: HVC Drill Audit Appendices  160000 140000 120000  :f:': •: ;'r. ;j::.->:ij5146,24E pjf $119,005  100000 z g  80000 ..fi 60000 40000 20000 0  llll •Bill •Illlll  AFE est. excl. training & instal.  IB  H H  166  • 314"5 22 Illil  ill  IwllilS • Hi1 •111  §|»||l§ • M B  AFE est incl. training &instal.  F. ledger val. in AFE account  Figure 9-5: Planned vs. Actual expenditure  Benefits Achieved The Drill monitoring technology revealed both qualitative and quantitative benefits. The qualitative benefits are difficult to quantify. In order to accomplish the difficult task of quantifying quality improvements, new justification techniques will be carried out, based on techniques developed by the manufacturing industry for the purpose of justifying advanced technology. An example is presented at the end of this section. The theory behind this method is contained in the appendices, however the basic axioms of the methods will be presented in the main text. Initially, qualitative and financial comparisons will be made between the estimated cost savings and the quantifiable actual savings.  4  Qualitative Benefits  The qualitative benefits promised in the AFE and the outcome are presented in the table below:  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 5: HVC Drill Audit Appendices  167  Table 9-8: Comparison of Qualitative Benefits Promised A F E vs. Actual Outcome  Promised Accuracy  driller accountability more benches  Final result There has been a distinct improvement in hole position. Previously, both surveyors and drillers were responsible for positioning the hole correctly. Now only the driller is responsible and has been given the tools to easily and accurately position the hole. Hole position went from an accuracy of ±1-2 meters to the current accuracy of+10 cm Drillers can be held more accountable for deviating from the pattern. Recording the position and time for each hole is a type of constant supervision, ensuring high quality  level Clean-up crews, the first workers to re-enter a newly blasted area, have reported an improvement on the amount of clean-up required compared with the period before the technology was implemented. Furthermore, shovels have reported less hard toes while truck drivers have noticed smoother bench levels.  less explosives There has been no distinguishable improvement in explosives consumption consumption that can be attributed to the technology. This is mainly due to the lack of resources to take advantage of all the information provided by the monitoring system. A great deal of data is recorded by the monitoring system that can be used to optimize aspects of the operation involving drilling. improved fragmentation  Fragmentation impacts the operation on many aspects. Reportedly, shovels require less ground engaging consumable. The mill has also reported an improvement in fragmentation. (many variables involved in the improvements mentioned above, fragmentation is assumed to be one of the most important). Mill throughput has increased by 7.4% in 1998, some of that increase may be attributable to improved fragmentation  automation option  No further autonomy has been adapted to the drill. A radio link is proposed, however, due to the current price of copper, it is an unlikely purchase.  material recognition  The material recognition software provides an index that is assumed to be related to the hardness of the material being drilled. Software adjustments have been requested to take jointing and blocks into account, since according to extensive materials testing it was determined that the different 'hardness zones' are not very distinct. However, a project has been proposed to compare the harness index results from the technology with the mine's hardness contours, tofindthe exact correlation.  improved explosives  There has been no change in explosives loading due to the presence of drill monitoring technology. However, it does improve the blast pattern initiation ground)  lesis.  Sean Dessureault  Masters of Applied Science TI  Appendix 5: HVC Drill Audit Appendices  5  168  U n p r e d i c t e d Qualitative Benefits  The unpredicted qualitative benefits were numerous. There are two types of benefits discussed here. The first deals with potential projects, where this specific technology is only a link in a long value chain of technologies that will eventually induce an overall economic outcome after a series of such projects. The second type of benefits listed in this section are direct unprejudiced qualitative benefits that have been mentioned or expressed by the respective affected individuals.  Potential Projects: 1. Upgrading pit hardness contours The technical supervisor plans to update the current pit hardness contours using the hardness index which is automatically measured by the drill monitoring technology. The potential benefit of better knowledge of the bench is to improve fragmentation through optimal pattern design. Once the exact contours are laid out, the appropriate burden and spacing can be applied to the pattern. 2. Automatic determination of local jointing Aquila Mining Systems claims to have the potential to detect the presence of joints through drill string monitoring. Acquiring the software required to make these measurements would allow a better prediction of the fragmentation since jointing has been identified (JKMRC, 1998) as the most important parameter governing fragmentation. 3. Tracking bit & string performance The current method of tracking bit & string performance is rudimentary and does not have the desired detail. The current method costs of having the driller alert the dispatch center that the bit or string is being changed. Using the automatically generated data from the monitoring platform, it is possible to track a single bit's overall operating time, where it did most of its penetrating and a host of other variables. 4. Overall throughput increase at mill The objective of the drill monitoring platform is to improve fragmentation. The ideal fragmentation is governed by the requirements of the mill. An ambitious plan is being contemplated by the mill to improve throughput by decreasing the varying size distribution arriving at the SAG mills. This will allow a less varying throughput. It has been established that having a constant throughput will increase copper recovery. The project is composed of many levels of monitoring and control devices that will allow the mill to blend the ore being fed to the mill. The drill monitoring platform will be used to calculate a polygon of potentialfragmentationdistribution through efficient use of the joint detecting and hardness index values, for an area around each blasthole. Therefore, as the polygon of material is being tracked through the system, the mill can plan to alter its processes to better handle the material.  Unpredicted Benefits 1. Split implementation In the event of a requirement to split the blast design, the blasting technician simply changes the design on computer, and update the drill computer. Previously, surveyors had to go into the field, erase the painted lines then redraw a new pattern (the second phase of the split). This induced tension between the individuals involved, such as the blast foreman, drillers and surveyors and resulted in significant rework for the surveyors 2. More informed design The blast design methodology has changed dramatically. Previously, the design and implementation of a blast pattern was a vague and unstructured exercise. It was subject to frequent confusion and resulting in delays in the pit. The methodology of design was changed to take advantage of the drill positioning systems, which resulted in an important benefit in terms of consistency and flexibility. By having a single methodology of design, there is less confusion, more consistency and improved operations-engineering relations. 3. Improved safety The first aid incidents have dramatically reduced since the implementation of the Aquila Drill technology. This is due in large part to the amount of time technicians now spend in the pit. Previously, it was customary that the survey technicians remain in the pit, performing such Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 5: HVC Drill Audit Appendices  169  hazardous or strenuous tasks such as pounding stakes (hammer accidents) and walking around on a drilled bench in the winter (drill holes, covered with snow may induce a sprained ankle when walked upon). 4. Operator acceptance Operators have expressed much approval of the system since "it makes the job easier". The resulting improvement in operator enjoyment of the system, due in large part to its 'video game' type qualities, may impact on productivity improvements and a better working atmosphere.  6  F i n a n c i a l Benefits  The financial benefits were determined while taking several influential factors into account, primarily the chronology of events relating to: • which drills had the technology • size of bit, pattern & spacing along with the resulting fragmentation The calculations and raw data used to determine the values in this section are provided in the appendices. Table 9-9: Financial Benefits - Results  Quantitative Variables  Less surveyor o/t Less surveyor matirials. Red. drill & blast costs Reduced shovel costs  Anticigated Benefits Predicted Actual $/year $10,800 $4,200 $104,470 $30,708  Comments  $33,866 $37,705 none directly attributable  Unanticipated Benefits Less 'caved' holes Design time for pattern Shovel productivity Drill utilization  $48,804 cost of drilling caved holes $50,794 extra technician time $125,936 $142,721  Estimated Benefits Reduced shovel maint. Mill throughput Totals less estimated Totals  $31,105  $78,000 $32,000  none directly attributable  $150,178 $181,283  $439,826 $549,826 * Overall improvement is much higher, however, drill monitoring resulting in better fragmentation is not the only variable that was altered in the time period under evaluation. ** Estimated benefits were rough appraisals made by experts in their respective departments, (example, A. Dance for milling information, R. Dhaliwal for maintenance) *** Based on savings incurred from less ground engaging costs and shovel cables.  7  Unquantified Qualitative Benefits  Several qualitative benefits that remain unquantified are discussed in the list below. These benefits would have a financial impact however, due to their highly integrated nature, they are impossible to quantify accurately. • less clean-up time: Better fragmentation and improved design would result in less clean-up time Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 5: HVC Drill Audit Appendices  170  •  less crushing of oversize: More of the explosive energy is used in breaking rock when holes are positioned correctly. Therefore there will be less big boulders which require secondary blasting and less wear on the crusher since less rock will require crushing.  •  less blaster time required: Since blast tie-ins are designed in the engineering office, blasters no longer require the time to 'figure out the blast layout'.  •  potential projects that have yet to be realize but will potentially induce large financial benefits  8  C o s t s & Final O u t c o m e  The final costs are based only on the final ledger account. Benefits were calculated by comparing the variables before the drill monitoring technology was implemented with the variables after all drills were outfitted with the equipment. Therefore the benefits and costs reflect the combined values for all variables of the 3 drills and technology platforms. The final financial evaluation variables are presented below. The chronological column represents the true value of the investment over a period of 1.5 years (implementation of the drill monitoring platforms for the entire fleet of 49R drills). The calculations and official HVC discounted cash flow sheets are provided in the appendices. Table 9-10: Final Financial Outcome AFE  Single  Actual Unit Chronological  Payback Period (using DCF $) Payback Period (using Real $) I.R.R. (%) (Using Real $) R.O.I. (%) (NPV / Investment) N.P.V. @ Prescribed Rate  1.3 1.3 75.1 228.1 $335,310  1.2 1.2 77.0 235.2 $341,561  Inital cost  $147,000  $145,229  9  Single unit Variance  1.3 1.3 44.5 246.8 $1,010,064 $ $409,282  $  0.0 0.0 -1.9 -7.1 (6,251) 1,771  A d d e n d a : Non-financial J u s t i f i c a t i o n  The purpose of this section is to raise awareness of the benefit of using non-financial justification techniques when evaluating technologies that involve many benefits and costs that are difficult to quantify. The manufacturing industry has developed many methods to evaluate projects involving integrated technology (wherefinancialcosts and benefits would be difficult to assess). One method of justification that is appropriate for this level of integration is called the Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP). It is a scoring method that allows the evaluator to be more consistent in the evaluation than conventional scoring methods. Consistency is a major barrier to the proper use of scoring methods. Human thinking is usually inconsistent. When using AHP a consistency index is calculated through a series of matrix calculations. This method can be greatly simplified when using a spreadsheet. An example of the results of this method is presented below. It was completed according to the sentiments of the mine superintendent. A second example of the calculations and a more in-depth explanation of this method is presented in the appendices. AHP begins by listing a series of objectives and options. The mutually exclusive options must reach, to a varying degree, the objectives specified. The list below represents the objectives and options that the mine faced when deciding whether or not to invest in the drill monitoring technology. Table 9-11: Objectives and options at time of justification  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 5: HVC Drill Audit Appendices  Objectives accuracy efficiency of drilling efficiency of blasting ease of design cost of option simplicity of option Options drill monitoring technology re-training/restructuring status quo  171  Abbreviation accu drl eff blst_eff design cost simp abbreviation Tech Train Quo  The process first involves comparing objectives, a pair at a time, and scoring them according to which objective is more important. Secondly, the options are compared, again two at a time, according to how well they accomplish each objective. During the comparison process, the consistency index must be below a certain value to remain satisfactory. The results from the evaluation are presented below. It can be seen that investing in the technology was a good choice, when compared with the other options. Figure 9-6: Results from AHP evaluation Results accu drl_eff blst_eff design Tech 0.71 0.56 0.25 0.65 Train 0.21 0.32 0.50 0.25 Quo 0.08 0.12 0.25 0.10 Cl: consistencty index: all statisfactory  cost s i m p 0.06 0.19 0.24 0.08 0.70 0.74  accu drl_eff blst_eff design cost s i m p Weigh 0.319 0.118 0.118 0.078 #### ####  Tech Train Quo  10  Overall Score 0.404 Winner of the final outcome 0.260 0.336  Recommendations  Several recommendations regarding the use of the drill monitoring technology was raised during the collection phase of this audit; • better utilization of the information provided by the Aquila Monitoring Platform is required • increased integration of hardness information with explosives use is necessary • purchase of a radio link to take advantage of more technician time and other optimization projects, should be reviewed  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  Appendix 5: HVC Drill Audit Appendices  172  C o n t r i b u t o r s o f Information: Steve Gapp Ken Anderson Mark Richards Frank Amon Ralf Kintzi Ranby Dhaliwal Dave Assmus Dave Ayres Dave Westfall Brad Aie Colin Murray  11 Table of A p p e n d i c e s Appendix A: Appendix B: Appendix C: Appendix D: Appendix E: Appendix F: Appendix G: Appendix H: Appendix H:  Official Highland Valley Copper discounted cash flow analysis results Shovel utilization calculation Drill utilization calculation Caved hole cost saving calculation Design cost saving calculation Mine engineering overtime cost saving calculation Survey material consumption cost saving calculation AHP - calculations relating to the conclusions expressed in the text AHP - in-depth explanation and example  T e x t s Utilized JKMRC, Report: Optimizing Fragmentation at Highland Valley Copper with respect to Mining & Processing Operations, June 1998 Winston, Wayne L. and Albrights, Christian S., Practical Management Science, Duxbury Press, 1997  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  Sean Dessureault  an CM  O  CM CO CN  1^ I .  a>  o>" CO "3-  on  O  CO CM  Is.  LO'  4>  >  ca  O  CO CM  T-|  CO  Is.  o  O  o o og o c o o CO c: CO cc  o Q. £n eO  a 5 -fi o O 1 H >i wo  > Uro  (0  "3  TJ C  (0  o  TJ O  c  3  a o  T3 IU  <L>  >  .S "o  1-  O  CM  co" co' co  IS.  co' T—  T  —  oo"  LO  o LO o"  r-  o  to  oo  co co  Q Ic  LO  on  LO CD  cn co  T-  oo Q  CN CN  oo co  3  o LO o r-o co  > >•  og in c  CO  C O C O t" t -  cc  CM  6 D  S  s C  '3  O  uy CO co  LU Q  UJ CO  ZD _ I  Q. < O  I  D)  c  X  CL  . ca  cu  <  Cd  <  CM CO  oo" oo"  = cn  o •a a tu  CO CN CM  a I. o "3 o  ST  60  CD CO LO  ca  o  o U  o  O O  O  u D. D.  O O  00 00 o o  ai  O  u w  •"S-l M  0 a"  JE  ai  CO CO  «< C  2  OJ LO LO  o ca  CU  c  CD  E  4->  a> > c:  O)  5  sS  is  C 4-.  Oi <u ro c x  s  £  w n  S o u  55  c £ ro o C/l X 2 >CD co ro O) i—  Ol Ol  55 u  o  o a o o  c » > fl!  c  "3:1  * 8  *o o c cu a.  CD  ro  «  a os _</>££  '>  c  lis 4 J  «  c/5 c n  Erf £  cu  O  @  5  t J  a  H  o C3 JJ o on T3  = ja  o OI~- 'C c c > o a a . s^' Q.  -  o o n a .a j o >. > es ca CL a . 1:  a z  <  T *  on  O  CM  iv W  CS!  co i  *~  *-'  *"1 "%  T—  0  rv  Tfr  O  S  CM  O co eq  T-  CM  tu  |v Tt col  c ai  <&  WD  OJ  c\  *E  -o  OO  <w  CO CO CO  cs cc cs  1  CO  T—  a  c  o  co  u  TT t ' Tt!  m i  o CO CM  CC . —  1  CM  o rv  OI  CM CT) Tc to ' col  cni  in  |v  iri  T Ttl  Tf col  <«  V  on  j3  T—  CM O  >  Tt  ai  CM  oo  O  <! a  Tco co  T - CM CO O CO T t | v CO CD 1-  TH co cc  N." |v CO CO  on  '3  o o> ail o> a  O)  cr  co"  m iri  O ^~  |v CM  O  CO I v CM CO rv" rv' iv  CM CN rv" |v Iv  ooi  in O  o  "cfl  CD  CO CO •<tl  cni  Tt  O  T—  1-  m  Tt  CM  |v  in  o in  CO  O) CM  o i  iri  CO ^—* Tt col  CM T—  ai  CO  CD CMI  CMI CO CT)  CO  iri  cri CD  CDI CM CO CO'  col  5 Ora <:  o  col  in  CM  M m  tl  o  >* o  |v  in  co  s co O —  OI CO  (0  TD C «  i  O C 3  O 5  o  o o  73  CM CN  CT) rv CO c o CM c c CM c c TT  co  m" co  o> co  cog ca  m" iri  a  cc  co"  CM  T  u  u  co ™  ai  o  co co  ca cc  00 co  a  05  cn  CO TCM | v IT  CM CN  M  TT" T —  oo  • MM  cs  CO XT. 1  mil cc  IT.  Tr'  <9 ao||  o c  fl  Tf  O  iv o CM T_  o  1—  CM  oo  CM  CO! rv CM  co'  iri  CM  Oil  in  iv  co  1—  co  rv o  csi T -  O I  rv o  Tt col  • ••• fl  ID CO CM O  o  co"  00  oo  co  w  c\ cs  |v CM  T—  c o " CO co T—  iri  CC  2 Q a  a. <  •3 <  X -a a <U ft  <  Tt  co  col  CO  00  co  o  o o  o o  fl  CM  CM 1 1  cd  t  oo"  C0|  o o  o o  CM  CM  i  co  CM CM O  CM  T-  CSI  rTt  T-: ^ iv' iri [g so".  I 1  co  ill  s a  o-  a) fl  Q  U >  cnil  12  ra ra  O  —  s  cr  1  1  LU  CO  < X  o a: CL  n:  c  .E ra cu —  c cu  E  Q_ < O  B  0)  5 o  —  ™  4-1  > c cu  4-)  •z  CU > CL C C °  cn CU  o sz CJ (_) V) CO  TT-  C CU c  fl  Ul  5? ^ ro M _ h- (_) o  CO CJ  cu >  >  E « o S! o J c/i d  sail  CO  |x:  3  +j  E 3  .Soviet ® CJ  5  ra T < xi u. —. >  a. r- a z  ai  O  oo  co  T-  O ) CD 00 CO o d  CO CO 00  LO CO  o  Til  rv  in CD LO  Tt  00  oo'  CD CO  •  o T_  1  oo  O  T-  T-  CM  CM  in in  a  Tt"  T*  1  1  con o CO  CM CO t CD' CO CO  cni  oo  O  T  co cc  CO CO  >  of oi  *7  1  LO  Tt  rv  Tt  rv rv  co d CO T  O  LOl  ©  V W) a  o  o  in LO co in  co" cd co co  "C  CO CO  o  o  CO  o co  I O CM LO T t CO" T j " CO CO CO  CN CO CO T  CU  !2  oo  o co cc CM CN CO CC cn" OJ  *3  s  a  1  on  o  Tt  co ca  CM CO  CM CO  CN CC  LO  S  o> of  3  w8 a s cr  CO CMf CM Iv co r-~  of iri CO CO CN  WD _©  cx  "o a -a  O  CN CM iri  LO CD CM  co"  CO  O CO CO  o  o CD  o  T~.  10  iri  1  co Tt  CO COI CM CO CO LOj  Tt  CD T~  LO rv CM  co"  Tt  CO CM  CM C0 Tt  in CO  o CD CM CO  iri  CM LO CD  o d o  00  o  T—  LO'  LOl CO CM Tt"  Tt  o o •H  CD 00 rv' CO CM  CM  LO Tt  CO rv  CM CD CD CM  o  in rv  ^—  co  CO  d  tl  CD  M  of  LO  3 (3  CO CO CN  . <L> Q  col  CO GO  CM CO  00  co  co co oo of  o  co'  10 CD CN  of  CM  LO  CN  CO CO CO  Tf—  COI CO  Tt  rv CD  ~  CO |v iq  CO  CN  co cc  . C O "3  CUD  o m  w  •a  a  H  CO CO CM CM CD CO CO CO CD af i r i CO  cc af cri  >» o3 re  cu  o  "  T  JS  cre  Tt  co"  ~  O) CM CD CM rv. CO  a  a> >  rv  CO  ©  CO n O •o 0) +* c  001  tv CM"  T—  T—  cu  ol  o  CM LO rv  K r-  T—  CD  Tt  CO  Tt  co'  CD O LO"  in  CO 03  Tf  to  CO  o  00|  CO  IO  CO  Tf  -is"  CD CO  00  12 12  CM O  LU Q  "C  o  T3  a ID  a, a. < 3  Q O  • PN  -  B  O  LU CO < I  o or  D CL  >  X T3  C  a. <  c cu  E +J  Q_ <  in  CU  cn CU >  CU  m co cu o c  TO I-  LO CU  o  8  cu  1—  <D OQ  CO cn •C in CO U U  S  | Is, X; m CO ^  O  XI  CO  I co  CT|  4-.  c O) a i  c \ ~  F  R CO  a>  n re  x  ca  co _ cu cn cu > cn c a O jo o $ 113 J cn ra < co c  CO  5  to  cn c  2  xu cj o  c •> ra co c o X  co  r-  a> -t->  CO  1—  o  o u  5 o  £ ro  LL.  3  in  co u 4-1  cu  sz CO u  x:  73  ra u cu >  4-i  cn  o  o  rr.  ro @  E  U  IS  c  <a 4A  ;E  OJ  u o C3 .SJ , 'o  CO  S  a> _  00  -a .22 "E,  CU  C  O  CJ in  a5 E CJ  » ^> a. 3  o  C? Cg"  O  21 Si  _ or  XI rv —  a.  >  z  . C3  t-s  3  ca <o CO  Q 00  CD CD LO CO CN  S3  o  •8-s  r  c LO CO LO O CN CO  S B. °>S 2 co 2> o> T - IN h-  CO CD b c  s  cu  £ S £  CU  o) in  cd ai P, T-  c o  se  a  c  .o  CN  ail  s?  to  CO  oo a>  s  cn  > co TJ  l o  1  is.  1  a o  on  JO  CO  I CN O  C XI CO S  CD TJ O)  CO CO O N"  CO c  _ 2  8  .« £ E % E .2.  S  CO 3 8 S 8 CO CN CN CM CN CM CN  S CO  _ co  s  CO CO is. oo  COCOCO^LOCOCO^CCJCO CO 00 i~-  LO  3  CQ  * •3 C  CD  -> —J < J T c 5 l c §  LO oo  o CN  ca a S CD  o l~-  38f2co83$io!^§  2  gi  5 SB 'S S t, 8 §  a.  3  o  | S co  O.  CO CO CN CN CN  O oS  O O r~ TJ- is. is. * S S t !2 g !^N-Cp'«-LQCO^-0)CNCJJa)-. CNCNCNCNCNCNCNCNCNCNCNCN  > o  co T - o LO o o S 8 oo  CO 5  1 § CN  1 u 3 u  42  sz  .— s CNs  o cn  1. s  Is.  r|sCO |s-  Is.  CO CO CN o |s- CO CN CN |s-  o co o c  c u  \l CO  "a,  <  co | V . m oo CO o CM O LO LO O TT T-  CO o <U CM  o c CD CM T - 00 T- LO Oi LO T- CO S CM O O ) CO «* 00 T- CD  CM LO  I^ I T* o d) Q  > CO T-  LO CM  o  CM O O m" CM  Is. CO CD TJ00 is.  J -  |s. O) CD |sTT r-  o  col  ISL O CO  TJTis00 O  "tf o  00 CD lO CD CO >. T-  CD CM 00 TJto" co" CM CO  I -  CM CO O O O T— LO" oo" CM CO  ~f o  3  aa  a.  a  <  U N C O X CD CD CD CD  a c  u  5. CL <  — —  N  5  d CO TO) co CO  T~  00 CO CO O LO CM T- Ol N O CD '  c ro CL  co  CU O T-  lO lO N " CD O T™• N - Tft 00  E  at  T~  2  S  2 JM CU (j) CM > L- T— CO CL  Tt  in »$ co o cu CO  1 0  CD O  co  o co o  [CO o CM CO CD O CD |s-  d T-' CM CM CO CM CD o o> CO —:  TCO CM CD O CM CO CN If) CO CO LO Is. CM O 00 O CN 6 ^ ^ CD fs. CO CO CO CO CD CO CD  CO  CD O 00 CO  CM CM CD CO  CM CM CD CO  00 CD CM CN  LO LO o ^•<* ^ CN 00 CO CD  CO in d  is. N" d  CM CO c  oo CD  CM CO N cd ° °  <S CO  CM LO r-- co CO O CD CD T — LO o> o  n <=> d  0)  in co  TJ  > o  c =3  <q  co mm  CO CO T- i n co *"» CM  c 13 T —> oo CO CO CD  ^3  <  N " m LO oo CM CO  CD CO CM O LO CN CD CO T —  ^  in in oo d oci  •a J! TJ  CO CO  o o  CD  s ~ " T J CM  T—  9  T—  i n LO o CN i n C\i T * CO co CN co CO m *~  "  H  CM  <  CN CO CO  cu cu  CD  Q. E a .  in  TJ  c  co  co co  c  'co to  •o  CM CO CM CO  . C  g  E E  ai  in  in  =  T3 0) C  CO  m  TJ" cu TJ TJ CO  T J  CD  CM  l  CO  TJ  d oo co in No -Q o -Q T *" ~  *~  .2  in « 55 J CCL O CL C = CU > c- TJ O CO J^J CO CO  CO  CD  C  «  in  in  S.  2  CO CN  co o  CO  ID Is. co CO CO CO CO TCO CO — T™ T  in  cu  2 > | c  1*1 1 O .2 TJ 8  Q- ?  9-  <  CU  lo  >, •co -o £ "D f  CN TN-  *-  >, -Q  "D co cu CM o T CM  rs. CD CO  Tfr  CO CD  CD CL  D  c CO CU  I *  ^>  CD CD  1  CL  c  mm,  i n CD . CN CD CN T-  d d oo LO TJ•<*• •<* T~ 0)0-1T- 00 |sCM oo i n i_ CO CD CM  CM CM CO 00 LO" LO CM CM  ><  5-  CO O O C CM oo O S CM 'S co" co" iS CM CM 3 o CM O O |scn" co"  <  -5  LO co CM |sCO ,_ is.  00  OO LO CO ' t CM CM O CO T-  e t c ! "  CM CO  CO  CO T T- CO T- CO |s- CO Tfr LO CJ) o  CO CD 00 T co" oo" CNJ CO  I T - LO LO CM I  CU CD O CD C O £ LO CO CD  — ^ T  s  N" ^  CO co d t- oo CO o T - CO  Is. CO CD CD  Q . CO o CD o T-' CO T - LO LO CD T- OO O CD CD T O) CD CO  LO CM  in oo in  > o  O CO LO CD LO  CD  m co in  CO  o  CO  CM  | m  CD  c o  c O  o o  CO CO  '"  E E E o  Fe  o  o LO" CM  Q.  sO ^  CO  Ja  to CO OO N" 00 O CM  re  T-  Ja  es r-  CO  O  O) c LO CD ^ T J > CD C LU •<fr CM co <£ CO CO O f o CD CD O TJ c  I f -c  O  cu  CQ  3 —)  5  o: g  a CD  CD T f * TJ 8 .C £D CD C to to Is. |s. CD CD c CO CO -5  o CO  CO p CO 00 CD CL  2 <  OS  r-  m o> CM  Is  Lo CD  ft c  cu E »  it.  « o  T3  <U "D "O  Is  £  CT •  o  m  03  s Ct)  cn oo"  s CO CO  C  03  CM CM  O l  •§1 LO" LO  LO CD CM  con"  I S  3  CO  Loi 15  o Os o o |co  o o o o" o  8.8  r  lo> IO)  o o o o" o  s  CO  cu  _3  CM  I?  CO  81  I * -  OI  co" o CM" in co  ICO  l°>  o o o o" o  s  a. > E c CU o T> T 3 '•3  CO  3^\' o o o o" o  OO  >  CO  LO  co" CM"  -'co CO,  Q  o c cxi cu E o cu  c o N  <U , O) ^  O CO CO T-  CO i  U C  S  CJ  >  CO  TT CO  3" co" co co  CM  cu CO CO  c s o co E  cu 3  > 2  a  «-»  <  c c  o g  S3 S3 3 3  3 <  «/-> *  •3 a  u CX CX  <  i  CD  < O  o  cu CU  cx  3  cx 1= a. a> o > o cu , cu ™l 3 l.o ~ lex £  c v> a o i_ a> cx «  all 10 3  iio (0  c  n  *Cc c o o o u  CO  « 9>.* d>  v> 8  18  8 °  — cu CO c 2 E  c u> ,o c o o >o cu co c o  mi ex  Q O >  c o  1 fie  •3  'C XJ  c: o|  QJ  O  </)  L.  o a o  CX  cu  L_  en  TD  CJ  TI  «*- «*-  o O cu CU  3 3 (0 (0  > >  co &i c o g  CJ  a  c  cu  8  2  TO  <  12  3 O CU CO E T3 c > o 3 •>  cu  E  0) CT)_  2  cu >  CO  T3  !>«i C  cu  CU  CD  c  0)  IS  a> u  c .JJ , U •O .2J  "3. , cx  o cu  -*—'  c  CO  o  00  •g 1  If i  CD CM  ig  p I  LO  er  CO CM  v> c/3- cyj- ««• LO  U S 5?  CD  co ltj> p . IO  8"  88 CD  K  I  XJ  CM  @  S  CO CD CN ^  O  CO CO T-  c "1  a o 3 °c3  -o 3 <  O O  o  J3  Q 1995  Q ><  a, a.  <  co CD'  T3  C  IU  cx cx  <  23.2  C3  U  C D  f  IS u o  a .JJ , '3 57.5  <  CM  §  00, T5 • JJ  "cx  per month per year  cx cx  1998  ID  OX)  .9 >  1997  •a5  u  1996  u u  , cx  CN so  in T - o is. O CO CO Is. oo CM  oo" oo" N."  •<r  CM  </» V* V> V>  O) ID IO <t O) ^ ^ T00 o oi 01 If)  i n co r s cn cn cn cn cn cn  Is. s LO  s  i q CM LO CO  o>  ^~  oo  cd csi oi CM CO CM  v>  *  co cn cn  CO Is. TT is. CM  Is.  eo 60-  CD Ol  ta 85  ro  CD  >  JO  O CO  CM  •2CD CD oi CO CO  oO c CO i2 TJ  cn  O  O  >O C  si x:  s  <hi wken alio  CD  erag  S 5  3  ho  A  -^•^  « "5  sz  B «  8 3  CO  8  4 8,  CO  4^  o o o  CO CO  CL  CD  Q I  OJ  .  is  cn cn  co E  co E  O OJ O) CD  LO Is.' CO O)  LO T ^ Cfi O) V LO T -  3o o  CD  Q > o 2 o  O  Q. CO CO  CO  <  12 3  o x  <D  5) 5  E t  CD >  v- O LO O) ^  O ** c  in  CO N"  is.  CJ)  CO  0)  CO  CO  a  in LO is. rs oo  a0)  T-  co  o in  CM LO CM »-  •c v  0) 0)  c c  O) CD  LU CD  rf o> O) CO CM  H  c  c  Q. <  CD  S3  C3w  00  u  •q- CO CO CM Is. T —  o  CO CN O CM T LO CO Is.  Oi Oi Oi Oi Oi Oi  00  Oi Oi  -a a sjnoi)  a>  D, O,  <  I  "a,  <  co  Io J8  •••MB HI! IB •Ml  i §" g f g' t& <A m  D  CX  cx <  m t&  <  X X  T3 C <L>  cx <  55 S co* §  8  g" 8" £ 8 <f> <s> m  ^5  «  «/}-  quilatect aquila tec  XJ  U >  58,975 21,269 37,705  S £ 5?  •3 c  Q  m  S g g  u o  m  I8|  |  1  mn  Appendix 6: Simulation Results  9.5  Appendix  PI 3.752223 3.939004 2.514596 4.134569 3.101222 2.984083 3.737894 3.314563 3.648315 3.19374 2.50138 2.340112 2.139321 3.716001 2.845979 2.057829 3.559203 3.822209 2.565383 3.722123 3.086605 3.4577 2.43699 3.055736 2.186243 3.136824 4.125317 2.717768 2.180071 3.194602 3.371954 2.559796 2.38039 2.830286 3.522341 3.746913 2.782294 2.47291 3.077398 3.110012 2.606321 3.041246 2.245927 3.256657 2.474796 2.112929 4.109524 2.747222 2.819134 3.846217  optimized P2 1.482668 1.454626 1.348117 1.29278 1.185773 1.287824 0.958048 1.534087 1.213184 1.118176 1.478384 1.095788 1.149407 1.219132 1.350965 1.136452 1.339949 1.269475 1.128868 1.16121 1.302876 1.313857 1.310053 1.46216 1.064207 1.212669 1.356881 1.204697 1.269812 1.320867 1.489464 1.036841 0.944792 1.334076 1.19835 0.99707 1.444024 1.05959 1.142777 1.207574 1.048916 1.064982 1.320885 1.496371 1.09665 1.499272 1.084723 1.321196 1.265817 1.340809  184  6: Simulation P3 4.119824 4.023782 3.614168 4.171211 3.833474 3.677366 3.521476 4.106477 3.857178 3.914626 3.501869 3.371902 3.340446 3.52108 4.058883 3.317066 2.837852 2.606691 3.363244 3.979398 3.498335 3.410382 3.499549 4.265575 3.026738 3.809518 4.364376 4.004847 3.256995 3.943004 4.128835 2.958928 2.890668 3.635498 4.197591 3.859637 3.757233 2.884862 3.414531 3.310796 2.735762 3.166924 3.19956 3.88267 3.03291 3.701465 4.131589 3.841881 3.155487 4.35393  Results  P1 2.531851 2.309464 3.253259 2.210776 3.617657 3.098524 2.686061 2.148698 2.466097 3.084715 2.608671 2.817875 3.180081 3.423543 2.846564 2.419273 2.380556 2.912423 2.971287 2.147695  505050 P2~ 2.368881 1.811451 2.604368 1.876124 2.899001 2.773654 2.055038 1.807595 2.262065 2.633379 2.347297 2.13482 2.485643 2.902571 2.479672 2.055129 1.966466 2.122211 2.178627 1.906977 1.971013 2.358238 2.304942 2.44543 2.017086 1.823818 2.428523 1.821349 2.028344 2.169111 1.965557 2.279185 2.299744 2.06107 1.936937 2.744494 2.401128 1.771413 2.806742 2.325282 1.727576 2.471525 2.114776 2.372894 1.845059 2.476097 1.892699 2.622435  2.25117 2.860412 2.753996 2.614151 2.548905 2.530187 2.960497 2.579289 2.409932 2.466269 2.39416 2.329221 2.874501 2.783417 2.396741 3.15633 2.780015 2.169836 3.219862 3.014167 2.252522 2.78638 2.642196 2.86576 2.476598 3.19203 2.107249 3.262177 3.028007 2.58346 2.482963 1.995141  P3 3.282281 3.407535 4.274687 3.377173 4.940881 4.259727 3.88445 3.429354 3.387668 4.567498 3.633393 4.422632 4.513063 4.609875 4.300985 3.553613 3.56841 4.458491 4.438859 3.246058 3.240283 4.249011 3.515628 3.410838 4.271983 3.894319 4.312406 4.410674 3.537224 3.406702 3.680566 3.190342 4.422933 4.370449 3.65761 4.066295 3.782895 2.992094 4.297028 4.753182 3.450113 3.618751 3.708365 3.996317 3.977873 4.76023 2.862206 5.011335 4.218436 3.398667  3.045637 1.248343 3.601162  2.70608 2.234641 3.920428  2.631714  2.953716  improvement  Masters of Applied Science Thesis.  11.%'  Sean Dessureault  

Cite

Citation Scheme:

        

Citations by CSL (citeproc-js)

Usage Statistics

Share

Embed

Customize your widget with the following options, then copy and paste the code below into the HTML of your page to embed this item in your website.
                        
                            <div id="ubcOpenCollectionsWidgetDisplay">
                            <script id="ubcOpenCollectionsWidget"
                            src="{[{embed.src}]}"
                            data-item="{[{embed.item}]}"
                            data-collection="{[{embed.collection}]}"
                            data-metadata="{[{embed.showMetadata}]}"
                            data-width="{[{embed.width}]}"
                            async >
                            </script>
                            </div>
                        
                    
IIIF logo Our image viewer uses the IIIF 2.0 standard. To load this item in other compatible viewers, use this url:
http://iiif.library.ubc.ca/presentation/dsp.831.1-0081151/manifest

Comment

Related Items